US7B10AS17K [NEC]
4-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCONTROLLER; 4位单片微控制器
| 型号： | US7B10AS17K |
| 厂家： | 
NEC |
| 描述： | 4-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCONTROLLER |
| 文件： | 总289页 (文件大小：1138K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
µPD17120 SUBSERIES
4-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCONTROLLER
µPD17120
µPD17121
µPD17132
µPD17133
µPD17P132
µPD17P133
Document No. IEU-1367A
(O. D. No. IEU-835A)
Date Published July 1995 P
Printed in Japan
©
1993
NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES
1
PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD FOR SEMICONDUCTORS
Note:
Strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide
and ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static
electricity as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it once, when it has occurred. Environ-
mental control must be adequate. When it is dry, humidifier should be used. It is recommended
to avoid using insulators that easily build static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be
stored and transported in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material.
All test and measurement tools including work bench and floor should be grounded. The
operator should be grounded using wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched
with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for PW boards with semiconductor
devices on it.
2
HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS FOR CMOS
Note:
No connection for CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If no connection is
provided to the input pins, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to
noise, etc., hence causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS
devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using a pull-up or pull-down
circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to VDD or GND with a resistor, if it is considered
to have a possibility of being an output pin. All handling related to the unused pins must be
judged device by device and related specifications governing the devices.
3
STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION OF MOS DEVICES
Note:
Power-on does not necessarily define initial status of MOS device. Production process of MOS
does not define the initial operation status of the device. Immediately after the power source
is turned ON, the devices with reset function have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on
does not guarantee out-pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. Device is not initialized
until the reset signal is received. Reset operation must be executed immediately after power-
on for devices having reset function.
SIMPLEHOST is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
MS-DOSTM and WINDOWSTM are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PC/AT and PC DOS are trademarks of IBM Corporation.
The export of this product from Japan is regulated by the Japanese government. To export this product may be
prohibited without governmental license, the need for which must be judged by the customer. The export or re-
export of this product from a country other than Japan may also be prohibited without a license from that country.
Please call an NEC sales representative.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written
consent of NEC Corporation. NEC Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in
this document.
NEC Corporation does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual
property rights of third parties by or arising from use of a device described herein or any other liability arising
from use of such device. No license, either express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents,
copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Corporation or others.
While NEC Corporation has been making continuous effort to enhance the reliability of its semiconductor devices,
the possibility of defects cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage or injury to persons or
property arising from a defect in an NEC semiconductor device, customer must incorporate sufficient safety
measures in its design, such as redundancy, fire-containment, and anti-failure features.
NEC devices are classified into the following three quality grades:
“Standard“, “Special“, and “Specific“. The Specific quality grade applies only to devices developed based on
a customer designated “quality assurance program“ for a specific application. The recommended applications
of a device depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each
device before using it in a particular application.
Standard: Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment,
audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic
equipment and industrial robots
Special: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster
systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed
for life support)
Specific: Aircrafts, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life
support systems or medical equipment for life support, etc.
The quality grade of NEC devices in “Standard“ unless otherwise specified in NEC's Data Sheets or Data Books.
If customers intend to use NEC devices for applications other than those specified for Standard quality grade,
they should contact NEC Sales Representative in advance.
Anti-radioactive design is not implemented in this product.
M7 94.11
INTRODUCTION
Targeted Reader
This manual is intended for the user engineers who understand functions of the
µPD17120 subseries and design their application systems using the µPD17120 sub-
series
Purpose
Use
The purpose of this manual is for the user to understand the hardware functions of
the µPD17120 subseries.
The manual assumes that the reader has a general knowledge of electricity, logic
circuits, microcontrollers.
• To understand the functions of the µPD17120 subseries in a general way;
→ Read the manual from CHAPTER 1.
• To look up instruction functions in detail when you know the mnemonic of
an instruction;
→ Use APPENDIX D INSTRUCTION LIST.
• To look up an instruction when you do not know its mnemonic but know
outlines of the function;
→ Refer to 18.3 LIST OF THE INSTRUCTION SET for search for the mnemonic
of the instruction, then see 18.5 INSTRUCTIONS for the function.
• To look up electrical characteristics of the µPD17120 subseries;
→ Refer to DATA SHEET.
Legend
Data representation weight
: High-order and low-order digits are indicated from
left to right.
Active low representation
Address of memory map
Note
: ××× (pin or signal name is overlined)
: Top: low, Bottom: high
: Explanation of Note in the text
: Caution to which you should pay attention
: Supplementary explanation to the text
Caution
Remark
Number representation
: Binary number
Decimal number
... ×××× or ××××B
... ×××× or ××××D
Hexadecimal number ... ××××H
Relevant Documents The following documents are provided for the µPD17120 subseries.
The numbers listed in the table are the document numbers.
Some related documents are preliminary versions. This document, however, is not
indicated as "Preliminary".
Part Number
µPD17120
µPD17121
µPD17132
µPD17133
µPD17P132 µPD17P133
Document Name
Data sheet
IC-8407
IC-8399
IC-8412
IC-8411
ID-8419
ID-8426
[IC-2972]
[IC-2976]
[IC-2973]
[IC-2974]
[ID-2971]
[ID-2983]
User's manual
This manual [IEU-1367]
EEU-929 [EEU-1467]
IE-17K
CLICE Ver.1.6
User's manual
IE-17K-ET
CLICE-ET Ver.1.6
User's manual
EEU-931 [EEU-1466]
EEU-847 [EEU-1412]
SE board
User's manual
SIMPLEHOSTTM
User's manual
EEU-723 [EEU-1336] (Introduction)
EEU-724 [EEU-1337] (Reference)
AS17K (Ver.1.11)
User's manual
EEU-603 [EEU-1287]
EEU-907 [EEU-1464]
Device file
User's manual
Remark The numbers inside [ ] indicate English document number.
The µPD17120 subseries has different pin names and signal names depending on the system clock type, as
shown in the table below.
System Clock
RC Oscillation
µPD17120
Ceramic Oscillation
µPD17121
µPD17132
µPD17133
Pin/Signal Names
µPD17P132
µPD17P133
OSC1
OSC0
fCC
XIN
XOUT
fX
System Clock
Oscillation Pin
System Clock Frequency
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses XIN, XOUT, and fX for descriptions. When using the µPD17120,
17132, and 17P132, please change the readings to OSC1, OSC0 and fCC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL.....................................................................................................................
1
1.1 FUNCTION LIST ................................................................................................................
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION .............................................................................................
1.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................
1.4 PIN CONFIGURATION (Top View) .................................................................................
2
3
4
6
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................................
9
2.1 PIN FUNCTIONS ...............................................................................................................
9
9
2.1.1
2.1.2
Pins in Normal Operation Mode .........................................................................................
Pins in Program Memory Write/Verify Mode ... µPD17P132, 17P133 only .....................
11
12
17
2.2 PIN INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT .........................................................................................
2.3 HANDLING UNUSED PINS ..............................................................................................
2.4 CAUTIONS ON USE OF THE RESET AND INT PINS
(in Normal Operation Mode only) .................................................................................
18
19
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC) .......................................................................................
3.1 PROGRAM COUNTER CONFIGURATION ......................................................................
3.2 PROGRAM COUNTER OPERATION................................................................................
19
19
20
20
21
22
22
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Program Counter at Reset ..................................................................................................
Program Counter during Execution of the Branch Instruction (BR)..................................
Program Counter during Execution of Subroutine Calls (CALL) .......................................
Program Counter during Execution of Return Instructions (RET, RETSK, RETI) .............
Program Counter during Table Reference (MOVT)............................................................
Program Counter during Execution of Skip Instructions
(SKE, SKGE, SKLT, SKNE, SKT SKF) ..................................................................................
Program Counter When an Interrupt Is Received .............................................................
22
22
22
3.2.7
3.3 CAUTIONS ON PROGRAM COUNTER OPERATION ....................................................
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM) ....................................................................................
23
4.1 PROGRAM MEMORY CONFIGURATION .......................................................................
4.2 PROGRAM MEMORY USAGE .........................................................................................
23
24
24
27
4.2.1
4.2.2
Flow of the Program ...........................................................................................................
Table Reference ..................................................................................................................
CHAPTER 5 DATA MEMORY (RAM) .............................................................................................
5.1 DATA MEMORY CONFIGURATION ................................................................................
31
31
32
32
32
33
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
System Register (SYSREG).................................................................................................
Data Buffer (DBF) ................................................................................................................
General Register (GR) .........................................................................................................
Port Registers ......................................................................................................................
– i –
5.1.5
5.1.6
General Data Memory .........................................................................................................
Uninstalled Data Memory ...................................................................................................
33
33
CHAPTER 6 STACK ........................................................................................................................
35
6.1 STACK CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................
6.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE STACK...........................................................................................
6.3 ADDRESS STACK REGISTER ..........................................................................................
6.4 INTERRUPT STACK REGISTER .......................................................................................
6.5 STACK POINTER (SP) AND INTERRUPT STACK REGISTER.......................................
6.6 STACK OPERATION DURING SUBROUTINES, TABLE REFERENCES,
35
35
36
36
36
AND INTERRUPTS ............................................................................................................
37
37
38
39
39
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
Stack Operation during Subroutine Calls (CALL) and Returns (RET, RETSK) ..................
Stack Operation during Table Reference (MOVT DBF, @AR) ...........................................
Executing RETI Instruction..................................................................................................
6.7 STACK NESTING LEVELS AND THE PUSH AND POP INSTRUCTIONS ...................
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG) .................................................................................
41
7.1 SYSTEM REGISTER CONFIGURATION..........................................................................
7.2 ADDRESS REGISTER (AR)...............................................................................................
41
43
43
43
45
45
45
46
7.2.1
7.2.2
Address Register Configuration ..........................................................................................
Address Register Functions ................................................................................................
7.3 WINDOW REGISTER (WR)...............................................................................................
7.3.1
7.3.2
Window Register Configuration..........................................................................................
Window Register Functions................................................................................................
7.4 BANK REGISTER (BANK).................................................................................................
7.5 INDEX REGISTER (IX) AND DATA MEMORY ROW ADDRESS POINTER
(Memory Pointer: MP) ....................................................................................................
47
47
47
50
52
54
59
59
60
61
61
62
63
63
64
64
64
65
65
67
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
Index Register (IX) ...............................................................................................................
Data Memory Row Address Pointer (Memory Pointer: MP) ...........................................
MPE=0 and IXE=0 (No Data Memory Modification) .........................................................
MPE=1 and IXE=0 (Diagonal Indirect Data Transfer) ........................................................
MPE=0 and IXE=1 (Index Modification) .............................................................................
7.6 GENERAL REGISTER POINTER (RP) ..............................................................................
7.6.1
7.6.2
General Register Pointer Configuration..............................................................................
Functions of the General Register Pointer.........................................................................
7.7 PROGRAM STATUS WORD (PSWORD) ........................................................................
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
7.7.6
7.7.7
Program Status Word Configuration ..................................................................................
Functions of the Program Status Word .............................................................................
Index Enable Flag (IXE) .......................................................................................................
Zero Flag (Z) and Compare Flag (CMP) ..............................................................................
Carry Flag (CY) .....................................................................................................................
Binary-Coded Decimal Flag (BCD) ......................................................................................
Caution on Use of Arithmetic Operations on the Program Status Word .........................
7.8 CAUTIONS ON USE OF THE SYSTEM REGISTER .......................................................
7.8.1
7.8.2
Reserved Words for Use with the System Register.........................................................
Handling of System Register Addresses Fixed at 0..........................................................
– ii –
CHAPTER 8 GENERAL REGISTER (GR) ........................................................................................
69
8.1 GENERAL REGISTER CONFIGURATION........................................................................
8.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE GENERAL REGISTER ..................................................................
69
69
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF) ...................................................................................................
71
9.1 REGISTER FILE CONFIGURATION .................................................................................
71
71
71
72
72
72
73
75
75
75
76
9.1.1
9.1.2
Configuration of the Register File ......................................................................................
Relationship between the Register File and Data Memory ..............................................
9.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE REGISTER FILE ............................................................................
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Functions of the Register File ............................................................................................
Control Register Functions .................................................................................................
Register File Manipulation Instructions ..............................................................................
9.3 CONTROL REGISTER .......................................................................................................
9.4 CAUTIONS ON USING THE REGISTER FILE.................................................................
9.4.1
9.4.2
Concerning Operation of the Control Register (Read-Only and Unused Registers) ........
Register File Symbol Definitions and Reserved Words ....................................................
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)................................................................................................
79
10.1 DATA BUFFER CONFIGURATION...................................................................................
10.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE DATA BUFFER..............................................................................
10.2.1 Data Buffer and Peripheral Hardware ................................................................................
10.2.2 Data Transfer with Peripheral Hardware ............................................................................
10.2.3 Table Reference ..................................................................................................................
79
80
81
82
83
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT .............................................................................
85
11.1 ALU BLOCK CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................
11.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE ALU BLOCK ..................................................................................
11.2.1 Functions of the ALU ..........................................................................................................
11.2.2 Functions of Temporary Registers A and B .......................................................................
11.2.3 Functions of the Status Flip-flop.........................................................................................
11.2.4 Performing Operations in 4-Bit Binary................................................................................
11.2.5 Performing Operations in BCD ...........................................................................................
11.2.6 Performing Operations in the ALU Block...........................................................................
11.3 ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS (ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION IN 4-BIT
BINARY AND BCD) ...........................................................................................................
11.3.1 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=0 and BCD=0 .........................................................
11.3.2 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=1 and BCD=0 .........................................................
11.3.3 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=0 and BCD=1 .........................................................
11.3.4 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=1 and BCD=1 .........................................................
11.3.5 Cautions on Use of Arithmetic Operations..........................................................................
11.4 LOGICAL OPERATIONS ...................................................................................................
11.5 BIT JUDGEMENT ..............................................................................................................
11.5.1 TRUE (1) Bit Judgement .....................................................................................................
11.5.2 FALSE (0) Bit Judgement....................................................................................................
85
85
85
90
90
91
91
93
94
95
95
95
96
96
96
97
98
98
– iii –
11.6 COMPARISON JUDGEMENT ..........................................................................................
11.6.1 “Equal to” Judgement ........................................................................................................
11.6.2 “Not Equal to” Judgement .................................................................................................
11.6.3 “Greater Than or Equal to” Judgement .............................................................................
11.6.4 “Less Than” Judgement.....................................................................................................
99
100
100
101
101
11.7 ROTATIONS....................................................................................................................... 102
11.7.1 Rotation to the Right ...........................................................................................................
11.7.2 Rotation to the Left .............................................................................................................
102
103
CHAPTER 12 PORTS........................................................................................................................ 105
12.1 PORT 0A (P0A0, P0A1, P0A2, P0A3)................................................................................. 105
12.2 PORT 0B (P0B0, P0B1, P0B2, P0B3).................................................................................. 106
12.3 PORT 0C (P0C0, P0C1, P0C2, P0C3) ... in the case of the µPD17120 and 17121 ....... 107
12.4 PORT 0C (P0C0/Cin0, P0C1/Cin1, P0C2/Cin2, P0C3/Cin3) in the case of the µPD17132,
17133, 17P132, and 17P133............................................................................................ 108
12.5 PORT 0D (P0D0/SCK, P0D1/SO, P0D2/SI, P0D3/TMOUT) ............................................ 109
12.6 PORT 0E (P0E0, P0E1/Vref) ... Vref, µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and
17P133 only ....................................................................................................................... 111
12.6.1 Cautions when Operating Port Registers ..........................................................................
112
12.7 PORT CONTROL REGISTER ............................................................................................ 113
12.7.1 Input/Output Switching by Group I/O.................................................................................
12.7.2 Input/Output Switching by Bit I/O ......................................................................................
113
114
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE ....................................................................................... 117
13.1 8-BIT TIMER COUNTER (TM) .......................................................................................... 117
13.1.1 8-Bit Timer Counter Configuration......................................................................................
13.1.2 8-bit Timer Counter Control Register .................................................................................
13.1.3 Operation of 8-bit Timer Counters .....................................................................................
13.1.4 Selecting Count Pulse .........................................................................................................
13.1.5 Setting a Count Value in Modulo Register and Calculation Method ................................
13.1.6 Margin of Error of Interval Time .........................................................................................
13.1.7 Reading Count Register Values ..........................................................................................
13.1.8 Timer Output .......................................................................................................................
13.1.9 Timer Resolution and Maximum Setting Time ..................................................................
117
119
120
120
121
124
126
129
130
13.2 COMPARATOR (mPD17132, 17133, 17P132, AND 17P133 ONLY) ............................. 131
13.2.1 Configuration of Comparator...............................................................................................
13.2.2 Functions of Comparator.....................................................................................................
131
132
13.3 SERIAL INTERFACE (SIO) ................................................................................................ 135
13.3.1 Functions of the Serial Interface ........................................................................................
13.3.2 3-wire Serial Interface Operation Modes ...........................................................................
13.3.3 Setting Values in the Shift Register ...................................................................................
13.3.4 Reading Values from the Shift Register.............................................................................
13.3.5 Program Example of Serial Interface..................................................................................
135
137
141
142
143
– iv –
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................ 145
14.1 INTERRUPT SOURCES AND VECTOR ADDRESS......................................................... 146
14.2 HARDWARE COMPONENTS OF THE INTERRUPT CONTROL CIRCUIT .................... 147
14.2.1 Interrupt Request Flag (IRQ×××) and the Interrupt Enable Flag (IP×××)...........................
147
147
14.2.2 EI/DI Instruction ...................................................................................................................
14.3 INTERRUPT SEQUENCE .................................................................................................. 152
14.3.1 Acceptance of Interrupts ....................................................................................................
14.3.2 Return from the Interrupt Routine .....................................................................................
14.3.3 Interrupt Acceptance Timing...............................................................................................
152
154
155
14.4 PROGRAM EXAMPLE OF INTERRUPT........................................................................... 158
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 161
15.1 OUTLINE OF STANDBY FUNCTION............................................................................... 161
15.2 HALT MODE ...................................................................................................................... 163
15.2.1 HALT Mode Setting.............................................................................................................
15.2.2 Start Address after HALT Mode is Canceled.....................................................................
15.2.3 HALT Setting Condition.......................................................................................................
163
163
165
15.3 STOP MODE ...................................................................................................................... 167
15.3.1 STOP Mode Setting ............................................................................................................
15.3.2 Start Address after STOP Mode Cancellation....................................................................
15.3.3 STOP Setting Condition ......................................................................................................
167
167
169
CHAPTER 16 RESET ........................................................................................................................ 171
16.1 RESET FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................................... 171
16.2 RESETTING........................................................................................................................ 172
16.3 POWER-ON/POWER-DOWN RESET FUNCTION .......................................................... 173
16.3.1 Conditions Required to Enable the Power-On Reset Function.........................................
16.3.2 Description and Operation of the Power-On Reset Function ...........................................
16.3.3 Condition Required for Use of the Power-Down Reset Function ....................................
16.3.4 Description and Operation of the Power-Down Reset Function ......................................
173
174
176
176
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING ............................................................... 179
17.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MASK ROM VERSION AND
ONE-TIME PROM VERSION ............................................................................................ 179
17.2 OPERATING MODE IN PROGRAM MEMORY WRITING/VERIFYING......................... 180
17.3 WRITING PROCEDURE OF PROGRAM MEMORY ........................................................ 181
17.4 READING PROCEDURE OF PROGRAM MEMORY........................................................ 182
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET .................................................................................................. 185
18.1 OVERVIEW OF THE INSTRUCTION SET ....................................................................... 185
18.2 LEGEND ............................................................................................................................. 186
18.3 LIST OF THE INSTRUCTION SET ................................................................................... 187
18.4 ASSEMBLER (AS17K) MACRO INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................... 188
– v –
18.5 INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................................................. 189
18.5.1 Addition Instructions ...........................................................................................................
18.5.2 Subtraction Instructions ......................................................................................................
18.5.3 Logical Operation Instructions ............................................................................................
18.5.4 Judgment Instruction ..........................................................................................................
18.5.5 Comparison Instructions .....................................................................................................
18.5.6 Rotation Instructions ...........................................................................................................
18.5.7 Transfer Instructions ...........................................................................................................
18.5.8 Branch Instructions .............................................................................................................
18.5.9 Subroutine Instructions .......................................................................................................
18.5.10 Interrupt Instructions...........................................................................................................
18.5.11 Other Instructions................................................................................................................
189
202
211
216
218
221
222
239
241
247
249
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS.......................................................................... 251
19.1 MASK OPTION PSEUDO INSTRUCTIONS..................................................................... 251
19.1.1 OPTION and ENDOP Pseudo Instructions .........................................................................
19.1.2 Mask Option Definition Pseudo Instructions .....................................................................
251
252
19.2 RESERVED SYMBOLS...................................................................................................... 254
19.2.1 List of Reserved Symbols (µPD17120, 17121) ..................................................................
19.2.2 List of Reserved Symbols (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133) ....................................
254
260
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS .......................................................................................... 267
APPENDIX B ORDERING MASK ROM .......................................................................................... 269
APPENDIX C CAUTIONS TO TAKE IN SYSTEM CLOCK OSCILLATION CIRCUIT
CONFIGURATIONS .................................................................................................. 271
APPENDIX D INSTRUCTION LIST ................................................................................................. 273
APPENDIX E REVISION HISTORY ................................................................................................. 275
– vi –
LIST OF FIGURES (1/2)
Figure No.
Title
Page
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Program Counter ...................................................................................................................
Value of the Program Counter after an Instruction Is Executed ............................................
Value in the Program Counter after Reset .............................................................................
Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Direct Branch Instruction ....................
Value in the Program Counter during Execution of an Indirect Branch Instruction................
Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Direct Subroutine Call .........................
Value in the Program Counter during Execution of an Indirect Subroutine Call.....................
Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Return Instruction ...............................
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
4-1
4-2
4-3
Program Memory Map for the µPD17120 Subseries ............................................................
Direct Subroutine Call (CALL addr) ........................................................................................
Table Reference (MOVT DBF, @AR) .....................................................................................
23
26
27
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Configuration of Data Memory ..............................................................................................
System Register Configuration..............................................................................................
Data Buffer Configuration ......................................................................................................
General Register (GR) Configuration .....................................................................................
Port Register Configuration ...................................................................................................
31
32
32
33
33
6-1
Stack Configuration................................................................................................................
35
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Allocation of System Register in Data Memory.....................................................................
System Register Configuration..............................................................................................
Address Register Configuration.............................................................................................
Address Register Used as a Peripheral Register ...................................................................
Window Register Configuration.............................................................................................
Bank Register Configuration ..................................................................................................
Index Register and Memory Pointer Configuration ...............................................................
Data Memory Address Modification by Index Register and Memory Pointer .......................
Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=0...................................................................
Example of Operation When MPE=1 and IXE=0...................................................................
Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1...................................................................
Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1...................................................................
Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1 (Array Processing).....................................
General Register Pointer Configuration .................................................................................
General Register Configuration..............................................................................................
Program Status Word Configuration......................................................................................
Outline of Functions of the Program Status Word ................................................................
41
42
43
44
45
46
48
48
51
53
55
57
58
59
60
61
62
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
8-1
General Register Configuration..............................................................................................
70
9-1
9-2
9-3
Register File Configuration ....................................................................................................
Relationship Between the Register File and Data Memory...................................................
Accessing the Register File Using the PEEK and POKE Instructions ....................................
71
72
74
10-1
10-2
10-3
Allocation of the Data Buffer .................................................................................................
Data Buffer Configuration ......................................................................................................
Relationship Between the Data Buffer and Peripheral Hardware..........................................
79
80
80
11-1
Configuration of the ALU .......................................................................................................
86
12-1
12-2
12-3
Changes in port register due to execution of the CLR1 P0E1 instruction .............................
Input/Output Switching by Group I/O ....................................................................................
Bit I/O Port Control Register ..................................................................................................
112
113
114
– vii –
LIST OF FIGURES (2/2)
Figure No.
Title
Page
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-12
13-13
Configuration of the 8-bit Timer Counter ...............................................................................
Timer Mode Register .............................................................................................................
Setting the Count Value in a Modulo Register.......................................................................
Error in Zero-Clearing the Count Registe during Counting ....................................................
Error in Starting Counting from the Count Halt State ............................................................
Reading 8-Bit Counter Count Values .....................................................................................
Timer Output Control Mode Register ....................................................................................
Configuration of Comparator .................................................................................................
Comparator Input Channel Selection Register.......................................................................
Reference Voltage Selection Register ...................................................................................
Comparator Operation Control Register ................................................................................
Block Diagram of the Serial Interface ....................................................................................
Timing of 8-Bit Transmission and Reception Mode
118
119
122
124
125
127
129
131
133
133
134
136
(Simultaneous Transmission Reception)................................................................................
Timing of the 8-Bit Reception Mode .....................................................................................
Serial Interface Control Register............................................................................................
Setting a Value in the Shift Register ......................................................................................
Reading a Value from the Shift Register................................................................................
137
138
139
141
142
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-17
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
Interrupt Control Register ......................................................................................................
Interrupt Handling Procedure.................................................................................................
Return from Interrupt Handling..............................................................................................
Interrupt Acceptance Timing Chart (when INTE=1 and IP×××=1) .........................................
148
153
154
155
15-1
15-2
Cancellation of HALT Mode...................................................................................................
Cancellation of STOP Mode...................................................................................................
164
168
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
Reset Block Configuration .....................................................................................................
Resetting ...............................................................................................................................
Example of the Power-On Reset Operation ..........................................................................
Example of the Power-Down Reset Operation .....................................................................
Example of Reset Operation during the Period from Power-Down Reset to
172
172
175
177
Power Recovery ....................................................................................................................
178
17-1
17-2
19-1
19-2
Procedure of program Memory Writing.................................................................................
Procedure of Program Memory Reading ...............................................................................
Configuration of Control Register (µPD17120, 17121) ..........................................................
Configuration of Control Register (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133) ..............................
182
183
258
264
C-1
C-2
Externally Installed System Clock Oscillation Circuit .............................................................
Unsatisfactory Oscillation Circuit Examples ..........................................................................
271
272
– viii –
LIST OF TABLES (1/1)
Table No.
Title
Page
2-1
4-1
Handling Unused Pins............................................................................................................
17
25
Vector Address for the µPD17120 Subseries ........................................................................
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Operation of the Stack Pointer ..............................................................................................
Operation of the Stack Pointer during Execution ..................................................................
Stack Operation during Table Reference ...............................................................................
Stack Operation during Interrupt Receipt and Return............................................................
Stack Operation during the PUSH and POP Instructions ......................................................
37
38
38
39
39
7-1
7-2
Address-modified Instruction Statements .............................................................................
Zero Flag (Z) and Compare Flag (CMP) ..................................................................................
49
63
10-1
Peripheral Hardware ..............................................................................................................
81
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
List of ALU Instructions .........................................................................................................
Results of Arithmetic Operations Performed in 4-Bit Binary and BCD ..................................
Types of Arithmetic Operations.............................................................................................
Logical Operations .................................................................................................................
Table of True Values for Logical Operations ..........................................................................
Bit Judgement Instructions ...................................................................................................
Comparison Judgement Instructions.....................................................................................
88
92
94
97
97
97
99
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.70H) ......................................................
Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.71H) ......................................................
Writing/reading to/from Port Register (0.72H) (µPD17120, 17121) .......................................
Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.72H) and Pin Function Selection...........
Register File Contents and Pin Functions ..............................................................................
Contents Read from the Port Register (0.73H)......................................................................
Writing into and Reading from the Port Registers (0.6FH.0, 0.6FH.1)...................................
105
106
107
108
110
110
111
13-1
13-2
13-3
Timer Resolution and Maximum Setting Time ......................................................................
List of Serial Clock .................................................................................................................
Serial Interface’s Operation Mode.........................................................................................
130
135
137
14-1
14-2
Interrupt Source Types ..........................................................................................................
Interrupt Request Flag and Interrupt Enable Flag ..................................................................
146
147
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
States during Standby Mode .................................................................................................
HALT Mode Cancellation Condition.......................................................................................
Start Address After HALT Mode Cancellation .......................................................................
STOP Mode Cancellation Condition.......................................................................................
Start Address After STOP Mode Cancellation .......................................................................
162
163
163
167
167
16-1
State of Each Hardware Unit When Reset ............................................................................
171
17-1
17-2
17-3
Pins Used for Writing/Verifying Program Memory ................................................................
Differences Between Mask ROM Version and One-Time PROM Version ............................
Operating Mode Setting ........................................................................................................
179
180
180
19-1
Mask Option Definition Pseudo Instructions .........................................................................
252
– ix –
[MEMO]
– x –
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
The µPD17120, 17121, 17132 and 17133 are 4-bit single-chip microcontrollers employing the 17K architecture
and containing 8-bit timer (1 channel), 3-wire serial interface, and power-on/power-down reset circuit.
The µPD17P132 and 17P133 are the one-time PROM version of the µPD17132 and 17133, respectively, and are
suitable for program evaluation at system development and for small-scale production.
The following are features of the µPD17120 subseries.
•
Comparator input (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133 only)
.
Comparison function with external reference voltage (Vref)
.
Canbeusedas4-bitA/Dconverterbyusing15typesofinternalreferencevoltage(1/16to15/16VDD)depending
on the software
•
•
•
3-wire serial interface: 1 channel
Power-on/power-down reset circuit (reducing external circuits)
µPD17P132 and 17P133 can operate in the same way as mask ROM version
.
VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V
These features of the µPD17120 subseries are suitable for use as a controller or a sub-microcomputer device in
the following application fields;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Electric fan
Hot plate
Audio equipment
Mouse
Printer
Plain paper copier
1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.1 FUNCTION LIST
Item
µPD17120
µPD17132
µPD17P132
µPD17121
µPD17133
µPD17P133
Product Name
Masked ROM
One-time PROM
Masked ROM
One-time PROM
ROM Capacity
1.5K bytes
2K bytes
1.5K bytes
2K bytes
(768 × 16 bits)
(1024 × 16 bits)
111 × 4 bits
(768 × 16 bits)
(1024 × 16 bits)
111 × 4 bits
RAM Capacity
Stack
64 × 4 bits
64 × 4 bits
5 address stacks; 1 interrupt stack
• 18 input/output ports
19 ports
Input/output port count
Note
• 1 sense input (INT pin
)
Comparator
4-channel
(VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)
4-channel
None
None
(Supply voltage)
(VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)
Timer
1-channel (8-bit timer)
1-channel (3-wire)
Serial Interface
Detection of the rising edge
1 external interrupt (INT): Detection of the trailing edge
Detection of both rising and trailing edges
•
Selectable
Interrupt
•
•
Timer (TM)
•
2 internal interrupts
RC oscillation
8 µs (when fCC = 2 MHz)
HALT, STOP
Serial interface (SIO)
System clock
Ceramic oscillation
Instruction Execution Time
Standby Function
2 µs (when fX = 8 MHz)
Power-on/Power-down
Reset Circuit
Incorporated
Incorporated
(Can be used on an applied circuit
(Can be used on an applied circuit
of VDD=5 V±10%; fX = 400 kHz to 4 MHz)
of VDD=5 V±10%)
• 2.7 to 5.5 V
Operating Supply Voltage
• 4.5 to 5.5 V (When using the power-on power/down reset function)
• 24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
• 24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
Package
One-time PROM Product
µPD17P132
–
µPD17P133
–
Note When not using the external interrupt function, the INT pin can be used as an input-only pin (sense input).
As a sense input, the pin status is read not by the port register but by the control register's INT flag.
Caution Despite a high level of functional compatibility with the masked ROM product, the PROM product
is different in terms of the internal ROM circuit and some electric features. When switching from
a PROM to a masked ROM product, be sure to sufficiently evaluate the application of the masked
ROM product based on its sample.
2
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
Package
Internal ROM
Mask ROM
µPD17120CS-×××
µPD17120GT-×××
µPD17121CS-×××
µPD17121GT-×××
µPD17132CS-×××
µPD17132GT-×××
µPD17133CS-×××
µPD17133GT-×××
µPD17P132CS
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
Mask ROM
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
Mask ROM
Mask ROM
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
Mask ROM
Mask ROM
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
Mask ROM
Mask ROM
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
µPD17P132GT
µPD17P133CS
24-pin plastic shrink DIP (300 mil)
24-pin plastic SOP (375 mil)
µPD17P133GT
Remark ×××: ROM code number
3
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM
• Block diagram of the µPD17120 and 17121
VDD
Power On/
Power-Down
Reset
XIN
Clock
Divider
System Clock
Generator
XOUT
fX /2N
CPU CLK CLK STOP
RF
P0A0
P0A1
P0A2
P0A3
P0A
(CMOS)
RAM
64 × 4 bits
INT
Interrupt
Controller
SYSTEM REG.
IRQTM
IRQSIO
P0B0
P0B1
P0B2
P0B3
P0B
(CMOS)
IRQTM
Timer
ALU
fX /2N
P0C0
P0C1
P0C2
P0C3
P0C
(CMOS)
Instruction
Decoder
P0E0
P0E1
P0D0/SCK
P0D1/SO
P0D2/SI
P0E
(N-ch)
P0D
(N-ch)
ROM
768 × 16 bits
P0D3/TMOUT
IRQSIO
Program Counter
Serial
I/O
RESET
GND
TM
Stack 5 × 10 bits
Remark The terms CMOS and N-ch in parentheses indicate the output form of the port.
CMOS: CMOS push-pull output
N-ch:
N-channel open-drain output (Each pin can contain pull-up resistor as specified using a mask
option.)
4
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
• Block diagram of µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133
VDD
Power On/
Power-Down
Reset
XIN (CLK)Note
Clock
Divider
System Clock
Generator
XOUT
fX /2N
CPU CLK CLK STOP
RF
P0A0
P0A1
P0A2
P0A3
P0A
(CMOS)
RAM
111 × 4 bits
INT (VPP)Note
Interrupt
Controller
SYSTEM REG.
IRQTM
IRQSIO
P0B0
P0B1
P0B2
P0B3
P0B
(CMOS)
IRQTM
Timer
ALU
fX /2N
P0C0/Cin0
P0C1/Cin1
P0C2/Cin2
P0C3/Cin3
P0C
(CMOS)
Instruction
Decoder
P0D0/SCK
P0D1/SO
P0D2/SI
Compa-
rator
P0D
(N-ch)
ROM
1024 × 16 bits
P0D3/TMOUT
P0E0
P0E1/Vref
IRQSIO
P0E
(N-ch)
Program Counter
Serial
Interface
RESET
GND
TM
Stack 5 × 10 bits
Remark The terms CMOS and N-ch in parentheses indicate the output form of the port.
CMOS: CMOS push-pull output
N-ch:
N-channel open-drain output (Each pin can contain pull-up resistor as specified using a mask
option.)
Note The devices in parentheses are effective only in the case of program memory write/verify mode of the
µPD17P132 and µPD17P133.
5
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
1.4 PIN CONFIGURATION (Top View)
(1) Normal operating mode
24-pin plastic shrink DIP
24-pin plastic SOP
GND
XIN
1
2
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
VDD
Note 1
P0E1/Vref
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
XOUT
3
P0E0
RESET
P0A0
P0A1
P0A2
P0A3
P0B0
P0B1
P0B2
P0B3
4
P0D3/TMOUT
P0D2/SI
5
6
P0D1/SO
P0D0/SCK
INT
µ
7
8
Note 2
9
P0C3/Cin3
Note 2
10
11
12
P0C2/Cin2
Note 2
P0C1/Cin1
Note 2
P0C0/Cin0
Notes 1. There is no Vref pin for the µPD17120 and 17121.
2. Pins Cin0 to Cin3 do not exist in the µPD17120 and 17121.
6
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
(2) Program memory write/verify mode
GND
CLK
Open
(L)
1
2
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
VDD
3
4
(L)
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
D0
5
µ
µ
µ
µ
6
7
8
VPP
D7
D6
D5
D4
9
D1
10
11
12
D2
D3
Caution ( ) represents processing of the pins which are not used in program memory write/verify mode.
: Connect to GND via pull-down resistor one by one.
Open : This pin should not be connected.
L
(3) Pin name
Cin0 to Cin3
CLK
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Comparator input
Clock input for address verification
Data input/output
Ground
D0 to D7
GND
INT
External interrupt input
Operating mode selection
Port 0A
MD0 to MD3
P0A0 to P0A3
P0B0 to P0B3
P0C0 to P0C3
P0D0 to P0D3
P0E0 to P0E3
RESET
Port 0B
Port 0C
Port 0D
Port 0E
Reset input
SCK
Serial clock input/output
Serial data input
Serial data output
Timer output
SI
SO
TMOUT
VDD
Power supply
VPP
Programming voltage supply
External reference voltage
System clock oscillation
Vref
XIN, XOUT
7
[MEMO]
8
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.1 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.1.1 Pins in Normal Operation Mode
Output
Format
–
At Power-
on/Reset
–
Pin No.
1
Symbol
GND
Function
Grounded
2
3
XIN
µPD17121, 17133, 17P133
XOUT
• XIN, XOUT
.
Pins for system clock resonator oscillation
.
Connected to ceramic resonator
–
–
2
3
OSC1
OSC0
µPD17120, 17132, 17P132
• OSC0, OSC1
.
Pins for system clock oscillation
.
Resistor is connected between OSC0 and OSC1
4
RESET
System reset input
Pull-up resistor can be incorporated by mask optionNote
–
Input
Input
5
|
P0A0
|
Port 0A
CMOS
.
4-bit I/O port
Push-pull
.
8
P0A3
Input/output can be set by each bit
9
|
P0B0
|
Port 0B
CMOS
Input
.
4-bit I/O port
Push-pull
.
12
P0B3
Input/output can be set by 4-bit unit
13
|
P0C0/Cin0
Port 0C and analog voltage input of comparator
• P0C0 to P0C3
CMOS
Input
(P0C)
|
Push-pull
.
16
P0C3/Cin3
4-bit I/O port
.
Input/output can be set by each bit
• Cin0 to Cin3 (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133 only)
.
Analog input of comparator
17
INT
External interrupt request signal input and sense input
–
Input
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option.
9
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
Output
Format
At Power-
on/Reset
Pin No.
18
Symbol
Function
P0D0/SCK
Port 0D, output of timer, serial data input, serial data
output, serial clock input/output
• P0D0 to P0D3
N-ch
Input
(P0D)
Open drain
.
4-bit I/O port
.
Input/output can be set per bit
.
Pull-up resistor can be incorporated by each bit by
mask optionNote
• SCK
.
Serial clock input/output
19
20
21
P0D1/SO
P0D2/SI
• SO
.
Serial data output
• SI
.
Serial data input
P0D3/TMOUT • TMOUT
.
Output of timer
22
23
P0E0
Port 0E and reference voltage input of comparator
• P0E0, P0E1
N-ch
Input
(P0E)
P0E1/Vref
open drain
.
2-bit I/O port
.
Input/output can be set by each bit
.
Pull-up resistor can be incorporated per bit by mask
optionNote
• Vref (µPD17132,17133, 17P132, 17P133 only)
.
External reference voltage input of comparator
24
VDD
Positive power supply
–
–
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option.
10
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.1.2 Pins in Program Memory Write/Verify Mode ... µPD17P132, 17P133 only
Pin No.
Symbol
GND
Function
I/O
–
1
2
Grounded
CLK
Clock input for address updating in program memory writing/verifying
Input
5
|
MD0
|
Input for selecting operation mode in program memory writing/verifying
Input
8
MD3
9
|
D0
|
8-bit data input/output in program memory writing/verifying
Input/Output
–
12
D7
17
VPP
Pin for applying programming voltage in program memory
writing/verifying
Apply +12.5 V
24
VDD
Positive power supply
–
Apply +6 V in program memory writing/verifying.
11
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.2 PIN INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Below are simplified diagrams of the input/output circuits for each pin of the µPD17120 subseries.
(1) P0A0-P0A3, P0B0-P0B3
VDD
Output
Data
latch
P-ch
N-ch
Output
disable
Selector
Input buffer
12
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
Note
(2) P0C0/Cin0-P0C3/Cin3
VDD
Output
latch
Data
P-ch
N-ch
Output
disable
Input
disable
Selector
Input buffer
Analog
(comparator)
input
Note Pins Cin0 to Cin3 are not included in the µPD17120 and 17121.
13
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
(3) P0D0-P0D3
VDD
Output
latch
Data
Mask option Note
N-ch
Output
disable
Selector
Input buffer
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option, and are always open.
(4) P0E0
VDD
Output
Data
latch
Mask option Note
N-ch
Output
disable
Input buffer
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option, and are always open.
14
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
Note1
(5) P0E1/Vref
VDD
Output
latch
Data
Mask option Note 2
Output
disable
N-ch
Vref
enable
Selector
Input buffer
Vref
Notes 1. The µPD17120 and 17121 have no Vref pin function.
2. The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option, and are always open.
(6) INT
Input buffer
15
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
(7) RESET
VDD
Mask option Note
Input buffer
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option, and are always open.
16
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.3 HANDLING UNUSED PINS
In normal operation mode, it is recommended to process the unused pins as follows:
Table 2-1. Handling Unused Pins
Recommended Measures
Pin Name
Inside Microcontroller
Outside Microcontroller
P0A, P0B, P0C
P0D, P0E
–
Each pin is connected to VDD or
GND through the resistor.Note1
Does not incorporate a pull-up
resistor by the mask option
Input mode
Incorporates a pull-up resistor
by the mask option.
Open
Open
P0A, P0BP0C
(CMOS port)
–
Outputs low level without
incorporating pull-up resistor by
the mask option.
Output mode
P0D and P0E (N-ch
open drain port)
Outputs high level with a pull-up
resistor incorporated by the
mask option.
External Interrupt (INT)Note2
–
Directly connected to GND
Directly connected to VDD
Does not incorporate a pull-up
resistor by the mask option
RESETNote3
when using only the built-in
power-ON/power-DOWN reset
Incorporates a pull-up resistor
by the mask option.
Notes 1. When externally pulling up (connecting to VDD through a resistor) or pulling down (connecting to the
GND through a resistor), make sure to pay attention to the port's driving ability and current
consumption. When pulling up or pulling down at a high resistance value, be careful to ensure that
no noise is caused in the relevant pin. Although it depends on the applied circuit as well, it is usual
to choose several tens of kΩ as the resistance value for pull-up or pull-down.
2. The INT pin is for the test mode setting function as well; connect it directly to the GND when unused.
3. If the applied circuit requires a high level of reliability, be sure to design it so that the RESET signal
is input externally. Also, since the RESET pin is for the test mode setting function as well, connect
it directly to the VDD when unused.
Caution The output levels of the input/output mode and pins are recommended to be fixed by being set
repeatedly in their respective loops in the program.
Remark The µPD17P132 and 17P133 do not contain pull-up resistors by the mask option.
17
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.4 CAUTIONS ON USE OF THE RESET AND INT PINS (in Normal Operation Mode only)
In addition to the function described in 2.1 PIN FUNCTIONS, the RESET pin and the INT pin have the function
(for IC testing only) of setting test mode for testing the internal operation of the µPD17120 subseries.
If a voltage exceeding the VDD is applied to either of these pins, test mode is set. Therefore, adding a noise
exceeding VDD even in normal operation may result in placing the pin in test mode, thus impeding normal operation.
For example, if the RESET or INT pin wires are laid out too long, wiring noise is added to these pins, thus causing
the above problem. Therefore, make sure that the wires are laid down in such a manner that such inter-wire noises
are suppressed as much as possible. If noise is still a problem, take noise countermeasures based on external parts
as shown in the illustrations below.
•
Connecting a Diode of Small VF between VDDs
•
Connecting a Capacitor between VDDs
VDD
VDD
Diode whose
VF is small
VDD
VDD
RESET, INT
RESET, INT
18
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
The program counter is used to specify an address in program memory.
3.1 PROGRAM COUNTER CONFIGURATION
Figure 3-1 shows the configuration of the program counter.
The program counters are 10-bit binary counters.
This program counter is incremented whenever an instruction is executed.
Figure 3-1. Program Counter
MSB
LSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
PC
3.2 PROGRAM COUNTER OPERATION
Normally, the program counter is automatically incremented each time a command is executed. The memory
address at which the next instruction to be executed is stored is assigned to the program counter under the following
conditions: At reset; when a branch, subroutine call, return, or table referencing instruction is executed; or when
an interrupt is received.
Sections 3.2.1 to 3.2.7 explain program counter operating during execution of each instruction.
19
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
Figure 3-2. Value of the Program Counter after an Instruction Is Executed
Program Counter Bit
Program Counter Value
Instruction
During reset
BR addr
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Value set by addr
CALL addr
BR @AR
CALL @AR
Value in the address register (AR)
(MOVT DBF, @AR)
RET
Value in the address stack register location pointed to the
stack pointer (return address)
RETSK
RETI
During interrupt
Each interrupted vector address
3.2.1 Program Counter at Reset
By setting the RESET terminals to low, the program counter is set to 000H.
Figure 3-3. Value in the Program Counter after Reset
MSB
LSB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
All bits are set to 0
3.2.2 Program Counter during Execution of the Branch Instruction (BR)
There are two ways to specify branching using the branch instruction. One is to specify the branch address in
the operand using the direct branch instruction (BR addr). The other is to branch to the address specified by the
address register using the indirect branch instruction (BR @AR).
The address specified by a direct branch instruction is placed in the program counter.
Figure 3-4. Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Direct Branch Instruction
MSB
LSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
Address specified by addr
An indirect branch instruction causes the address in the address counter to be placed in the program counter.
20
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
Figure 3-5. Value in the Program Counter during Execution of an Indirect Branch Instruction
MSB
LSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
AR9 AR8 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
3.2.3 Program Counter during Execution of Subroutine Calls (CALL)
There are two ways to specify branching using subroutine calls. One is to specify the branch address in the operand
using the direct subroutine call (CALL addr). The other is to branch to the address specified by the address register
using the indirect subroutine call (CALL @AR).
A direct subroutine call causes the value in the program counter to be saved in the stack and then the address
specified in the operand to be placed in the program counter. Direct subroutine calls can specify any address in
program memory.
Figure 3-6. Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Direct Subroutine Call
MSB
LSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
Address specified by addr
An indirect subroutine call causes the value in the program counter to be saved in the stack and then the value
in the address register to be placed in the program counter.
Figure 3-7. Value in the Program Counter during Execution of an Indirect Subroutine Call
Address stack register n
(n = 0 to 4)
LSB
MSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
AR9 AR8 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
21
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
3.2.4 Program Counter during Execution of Return Instructions (RET, RETSK, RETI)
During execution of a return instruction (RET, RETSK, RETI), the program counter is restored to the value saved
in the address stack register.
Figure 3-8. Value in the Program Counter during Execution of a Return Instruction
Address stack register n
(n = 0 to 4)
LSB
PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
MSB
3.2.5 Program Counter during Table Reference (MOVT)
During execution of table reference (MOVT DBF, @AR), the value in the program counter is saved in the stack,
the address register is set by the program counter, then the contents stored at that program memory location is read
into the data buffer (DBF). After the program memory contents are read into DBF, the program counter is restored
to the value saved in the address stack register.
Caution One level of the address stack is temporarily used during execution of table reference. Be careful
of the stack level.
3.2.6 Program Counter during Execution of Skip Instructions (SKE, SKGE, SKLT, SKNE, SKT SKF)
When skip conditions are met and a skip instruction (SKE, SKGE, SKLT, SKNE, SKT, SKF) is executed, the
instruction immediately following the skip instruction is treated as a no operation instruction (NOP). Therefore,
whether skip conditions are met or not, the number of instructions executed and instruction execution time remain
the same.
3.2.7 Program Counter When an Interrupt Is Received
When an interrupt is received, the value in the program counter is saved in the address stack. Next, the vector
address for the interrupt received is placed in the program counter.
3.3 CAUTIONS ON PROGRAM COUNTER OPERATION
Consisting of 10 bits, the µPD17120/17121's program counter (PC) can specify a program of up to 1024 steps.
As opposed to this, the ROM size is only 768 steps (addresses 0000H-02FFH). If the program counter's value exceeds
300H, the contents of the program are equivalent to reading FFFFH and executing the "SKF PSW, #0FH" instruction.
Therefore, be careful about the following point:
(1) When the instruction at the 768th step (address 02FFH) is executed, it does not automatically happen that
the program counter goes to 0000H. If the instruction up to the 768th step (address 02FFH) is other than
a branch (BR) or (RET) instruction, it will result in specifying a program counter not contained in a ROM. Be
careful about this.
(2) In the same manner as (1), please avoid using an instruction that will branch to after the 768th step (address
02FFH).
22
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
The program configuration of the µPD17120 subseries is as follows.
Product Name
µPD17120
Program Memory Capacity Program Memory Address
1.5K bytes (768 × 16 bits)
0000H-02FFH
µPD17121
µPD17132
µPD17133
2K bytes (1024 × 16 bits)
0000H-03FFH
µPD17P132
µPD17P133
Program memory stores the program, and the constant data table. The top of the program memory is allocated
to the reset start address and the interrupted vector address. The program memory address is specified by the
program counter.
4.1 PROGRAM MEMORY CONFIGURATION
Figure 4-1 shows the program memory map. Branch instructions, subroutine calls, and table references can
specify any address in program memory (0000H - 07FFH).
Figure 4-1. Program Memory Map for the µPD17120 Subseries
Address
0000H
16 bits
Subroutine entry
address for the CALL
addr instruction
Reset start address
0001H
0002H
0003H
Serial interface interrupt vector
Timer interrupt vector
Branch address for
the BR addr instruction
Branch address for
the BR @AR instruction
External (INT) interrupt vector
µ
Subroutine entry
address for the CALL
@AR instruction
(
PD17120/17121)
02FFH
03FFH
Table reference address
for the MOVT DBF,
@AR instruction
µ
(
PD17132/17133/17P132/17P133)
23
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
4.2 PROGRAM MEMORY USAGE
Program memory has the following two main functions:
(1) Storage of the program
(2) Storage of constant data
The program is made up of the instructions which operate the CPU (Central Processing Unit). The CPU executes
sequential processing according to the instructions stored in the program. In other words, the CPU reads each
instruction in the order stored by the program in program memory and executes it.
Since all instructions are 16-bit long words, each instruction is stored in a single location in program memory.
Constant data, such as display output patterns, are set beforehand. The MOVT instruction is used to transfer data
from program memory to the data buffer (DBF) in data memory. Reading the constant data in program memory is
called table reference.
Program memory is read-only (ROM: Read Only Memory) and therefore cannot be changed by any instructions.
4.2.1 Flow of the Program
The program is usually stored in program memory starting from memory location 0000H and executed sequentially
one memory location at a time. However, if for some reason a different kind of program is to be executed, it will
be necessary to change the flow of the program. In this case, the branch instruction (BR instruction) is used.
If the same section of program code is going to appear in a number of places, reproducing the code each time
it needs to be used will decrease the efficiency of the program. In this case, this section of program code should
be stored in only one place in memory. Then, by using the CALL instruction, this piece of code can be executed
or read as many times as needed within the program. Such a piece of code is called a subroutine. As opposed to
a subroutine, code used during normal operation is called the main routine.
For cases completely unrelated to the flow of the program (in which a section of code is to be executed when
a certain condition arises), the interrupt function is used. Whenever a condition arises that is unrelated to the flow
of the program, the interrupt function can be used to branch the program to a prechosen memory location (called
a vector address).
Items (1) to (5) explain branching of the program using the interrupt function and CPU instructions.
(1) Vector Address
Table 4-1 shows the address to which the program is branched (vector address) when a reset or interrupt
occurs.
24
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Table 4-1. Vector Address for the µPD17120 Subseries
Vector Address
0000H
Interrupt Sources
Reset
0001H
Serial interface interrupt
Timer interrupt
0002H
0003H
External interrupt (INT pin)
(2) Direct branch
When executing a direct branch (BR addr), the 11-bit instruction operand is used to specify an address in
program memory. (However, the most significant bit must be 0. If an address is specified outside of this
range, an error will occur in the assembler.) A direct branch instruction can be used to branch to any address
in program memory.
(3) Indirect branch
When executing an indirect branch (BR @AR), the program branches to the address specified by the value
stored in the address register (AR). An indirect branch can be used to branch to any address in program
memory.
Also refer to 7.2 ADDRESS REGISTER (AR).
(4) Direct subroutine call
When using a direct subroutine call (CALL addr), the 11-bit instruction operand is used to specify a program
memory address of the called subroutine. (However, the most significant bit must be 0. If an address is
specified outside of this range, an error will occur in the assembler).
25
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
Example
Figure 4-2. Direct Subroutine Call (CALL addr)
Program memory
Adddress
0000H
CALL SUB1
SUB1:
RET
03FFH Note
Note The last address of the program memory of the µPD17120 and µPD17121 is 02FFH.
(5) Indirect subroutine call
When using an indirect subroutine call (CALL @AR), the value in the address register (AR) should be an address
of the called subroutine. This instruction can be used to call any address in program memory.
Also refer to 7.2 ADDRESS REGISTER (AR).
26
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
4.2.2 Table Reference
Table reference is used to reference constant data in program memory.
The table reference instruction (MOVT DBF, @AF) is used to store the contents of the program memory address
specified by the address register in the data buffer.
Since each location in program memory contains 16 bits of information, the MOVT instruction causes 16 bits of
data to be stored in the data buffer. The address register can be used to table reference any location in program
memory.
Caution Note that one level of the stack is temporarily used when performing table reference.
Also refer to 7.2 ADDRESS REGISTER (AR) and CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF).
Remark As an exception, execution of table reference instructions requires two instruction cycle.
Figure 4-3. Table Reference (MOVT DBF, @AR)
Data buffer
Program memory
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
16-bit data read
Address register
AR2 AR1
AR3
AR0
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Constant data
Table addressing
27
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
(1) Constant data table
Example 1 shows an example of code used to reference a constant data table.
Example 1. Code used for reading the values recorded in a constant data table. The value specified
by an OFFSET value is read.
OFFSET
MEM
; BANK0
MOV
0.00H
; Storing area for the offset address.
RPH,#0
; Register pointer 7 is used to specify that
; operation results be stored in row address 7.
MOV
RPL,#7 SHL 1
ROMREF:
; BANK0
; Stores the start address of the constant data
; table in the address register (AR).
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
AR3, #.DL.TABLE SHR 12 AND 0FH
AR2, #.DL.TABLE SHR 8 AND 0FH
AR1, #.DL.TABLE SHR 4 AND 0FH
AR0, #.DL.TABLE AND 0FH
ADD
AR0, OFFSET
AR1, #0
; Adds the offset address.
ADDC
ADDC
ADDC
MOVT
AR2, #0
AR3, #0
DBF, @AR
; Executes the table reference instruction.
TABLE:
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
0001H
0002H
0004H
0008H
0010H
0020H
0040H
0080H
0100H
0200H
0400H
0800H
1000H
2000H
4000H
8000H
END
28
CHAPTER 4 PROGRAM MEMORY (ROM)
(2) Branch table
Example 2 shows an example of code used to reference a branch table.
Example 2. Code used for reading the values recorded in a branch table. The value specified by
an OFFSET value is read.
OFFSET
MEM
0.00H
; Storing area for the offset address.
; BANK0
MOV
RPH,#0
; Sets the register pointer to row
; address 7.
MOV
RPL,#7 SHL 1
ROMREF:
; BANK0
; Stores the start address of the constant data
; table in the address register (AR).
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
AR3, #.DL.TABLE SHR 12 AND 0FH
AR2, #.DL.TABLE SHR 8 AND 0FH
AR1, #.DL.TABLE SHR 4 AND 0FH
AR0, #.DL.TABLE AND 0FH
ADD
ADDC
MOVT
PUT
AR0, OFFSET
AR1, #0
; Adds the offset address.
; Executes the table reference instruction.
DBF, @AR
AR, DBF
@AR
BR
TABLE:
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
0001H
0002H
0004H
0008H
0010H
0020H
0040H
0080H
0100H
0200H
END
29
[MEMO]
30
CHAPTER 5 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
Data memory stores data such as operation and control data. Data can be read from or written to data memory
with an instruction during normal operation.
5.1 DATA MEMORY CONFIGURATION
Figure 5-1 shows the configuration of data memory.
Data memory is controlled by the concept called banks. The µPD17120 subseries has BANK0 only.
An address is allocated to the data memory for each bank.
An address consists of four bits of memory called "a nibble".
The address of data memory consists of 7 bits. The three high-order bits are called "the row address", and the
four low-order bits are called "the column address". For example, when the address of data memory is 1AH
(0011010B), the row address is 1H (001B), and the column address is AH (1010B).
In the case of the µPD17120 and 17121, addresses 40H to 6EH should not be used because they are non-mounted
areas.
Sections 5.1.1 to 5.1.6 describe functions of data memory other than its use as address space.
Figure 5-1. Configuration of Data Memory
BANK0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
DBF3 DBF2 DBF1 DBF0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Example:
Address 1AH
of BANK0
P0E
(2 bits)
P0A
P0B
P0C
P0D
4 bits 4 bits 4 bits 4 bits
System register
Remark The shaded parts represent the non-mounted area in the case of the µPD17120 and 17121.
31
CHAPTER 5 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
5.1.1 System Register (SYSREG)
The system register (SYSREG) consists of the 12 nibbles allocated at addresses 74H to 7FH in data memory. The
system register (SYSREG) is allocated independently of the banks. This means that each bank has the same system
register at addresses 74H to 7FH.
Figure 5-2 shows the configuration of the system register.
Figure 5-2. System Register Configuration
System Register (SYSREG)
Address
74H
75H
76H
77H
78H
79H
7AH
7BH
7CH
7DH
7EH
7FH
Index register
(IX)
Window
register
(WR)
Bank
General
register
Program
Name
Address register
(AR)
register
(BANK)
status word
Data memory
row address
pointer (MP)
(Symbol)
pointer (RP) (PSWORD)
5.1.2 Data Buffer (DBF)
The data buffer consists of four nibbles allocated at addresses 0CH to 0FH in BANK0 of data memory. Figure
5-3 shows the configuration of the data buffer.
Figure 5-3. Data Buffer Configuration
Data Buffer (DBF)
Address
Symbol
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
DBF3 DBF2 DBF1 DBF0
5.1.3 General Register (GR)
The general register consists of 16 nibbles specified by an arbitrary row address in a bank in data memory.
This arbitrary row address in a bank is pointed to by the register pointer (RP) in the system register (SYSREG).
In the case of the µPD17120 and 17121, addresses 40H to 6EH are non-mounted areas. These areas should not
be specified as a general register.
Figure 5-4 shows the configuration of the general register (GR).
32
CHAPTER 5 DATA MEMORY (RAM)
Figure 5-4. General Register (GR) Configuration
BANK0
Column address
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Area specifiable as general register
Pointed to by general register
pointer (RP) in system register.
Note that row addresses 4 to 6
µ
in the case of the PD17120
and 17121 are uninstalled mem-
ory locations. The register
pointer (RP) should therefore
not specify a row address in this
area.
Port register
SYSREG
5.1.4 Port Registers
A port register consists of five nibbles allocated at addresses 6FH to 73H in Bank0 of the data memory. As shown
in Figure 5-5, the two high-order bits of address 6FH are always set to 0.
Figure 5-5 shows the configuration of the port registers.
Figure 5-5. Port Register Configuration
Port Register
Address
BANK0
6FH
P0E
70H
P0A
71H
P0B
72H
P0C
73H
P0D
P
P
0
E
0
P
0
A
3
P
P
0
A
1
P
0
A
0
P
0
B
3
P
P
0
B
1
P
0
B
0
P
0
C
3
P
P
0
C
1
P
0
C
0
P
0
P
P
0
P
0
0
E
1
0
A
2
0
B
2
0
C
2
0
D
2
0
0
D
3
D
1
D
0
5.1.5 General Data Memory
General data memory is all the data memory not used by the port and system registers (SYSREG). In other words,
general data memory consists of 64 nibbles (µPD17120 and 17121) or 111 nibbles (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and
17P133).
5.1.6 Uninstalled Data Memory
There is no hardware installed at addresses 40H to 6EH of the µPD17120 and 17121. Any attempt to read this
area will yield unpredictable results. Writing data to this area is invalid and should therefore not be attempted.
33
[MEMO]
34
CHAPTER 6 STACK
The stack is a register used to save information such as the program return address and the contents of the system
register during execution of subroutine calls, interrupts and similar operations.
6.1 STACK CONFIGURATION
Figure 6-1 shows the stack configuration.
The stack consists of the following parts: one 3-bit binary counter stack pointer, five 10-bit address stack registers,
and one 5-bit interrupt stack registers.
Figure 6-1. Stack Configuration
Stack Pointer
(SP)
Address Stack Register
(ASR)
b2
b1
b0
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
SPb2 SPb1
SPb0
0H
Address stack register 0
Address stack register 1
Address stack register 2
Address stack register 3
Address stack register 4
1H
2H
3H
4H
Interrupt Stack Register
(INTSK)
0H
BCDSK CMPSK
CYSK
ZSK
IXESK
6.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE STACK
The stack is used to save the return address during execution of subroutine calls and table reference instructions.
When an interrupt occurs, the program return address and the program status word (PSWORD) are automatically
saved in the stack.
Remark All the 5 bits of PSWORD are automatically cleared to zero after being saved in the interrupt stack
register.
35
CHAPTER 6 STACK
6.3 ADDRESS STACK REGISTER
As shown in Figure 6-1, the address stack register consists of five consecutive 10-bit registers.
A value equal to the program counter (PC)+1 (return address) is stored during execution of subroutine calls (CALL
addr, CALL @AR), the first cycle of a table reference (MOVT DBF, @AR), and upon receipt of an interrupt in the address
stack register. The contents of the address register (AR) is also stored when a stack push (PUSH AR) is executed.
The address register holding data is pointed to by the address in the stack pointer at execution time less one (address
in stack pointer (SP) – 1).
When a subroutine return (RET, RETSK), an interrupt return (RETI), or the second cycle of a table reference (MOVT
DBF, @AR) is executed, the contents of the address pointed to by the stack pointer is restored to the program counter
and the stack pointer is incremented. When a stack pop (POP AR) is executed, the value in the address stack register
pointed to by the stack pointer is transferred to the address to the address register and the stack pointer is
incremented.
If more than five subroutine calls or interrupts are executed, an internal reset signal is generated, and the
address stack register initializes hardware for start at address 0000H (to prevent a software crash).
6.4 INTERRUPT STACK REGISTER
As shown in Figure 6-1, the interrupt stack register consists of one 5-bit register.
When an interrupt is received five bits in the system register (SYSREG) (mentioned later) that is, each flag (BCD,
CMP, CY, Z, IXE) of the program status word (PSWORD), are saved. When the interrupt return (RETI) is executed,
the program status word is restored from the interrupt stack register.
In the interrupt stack register, every time an interrupt is received, necessary data is saved.
When more than three interrupts are received, the data from the first interrupt is lost.
Remark All the 5 bits of PSWORD are automatically cleared to zero after being saved in the interrupt stack
register.
6.5 STACK POINTER (SP) AND INTERRUPT STACK REGISTER
As shown in Figure 6-1, the stack pointer (SP) is a 3-bit binary counter used to point to addresses in the five address
stack registers. The stack pointer is located at address 01H in the register file. At reset, the stack pointer is set
to 5.
As shown in Table 6-1, the stack pointer is decremented when subroutine calls (CALL addr, CALL @AR), the first
cycle of a table reference (MOVT DBF, @AR), stack push (PUSH AR), and an interrupt are accepted. The stack pointer
is incremented at the following times: subroutine returns (RET, RETSK), the second instruction cycle of a table
reference (MOVT DBF, @AR), stack pop (POP AR), and an interrupt return (RETI). The interrupt stack counter as
well as the stack pointer is decremented when an interrupt is accepted. The interrupt stack counter is incremented
by an interrupt return (RETI) only.
36
CHAPTER 6 STACK
Table 6-1. Operation of the Stack Pointer
Instruction
CALL addr
Stack Pointer Value
Counter of Interrupt Stack Register
CALL @AR
MOVT DBF, @AR
(1st instruction cycle)
PUSH AR
–1
–1
+1
+1
Not changed
Interrupt receipt
–1
Not changed
+1
RET
RETSK
MOVT DBF, @AR
(2nd instruction cycle)
POP AR
RETI
As mentioned above, the stack pointer is a 3-bit counter and therefore can conceivably store any of the eight values
from 0H to 7H. Since there are only five address stack registers, however, a stack pointer value that is greater than
five will cause an internal reset signal to be generated (to prevent a software crash).
Since the stack pointer is located in the register file, it can be read and written to directly by using the PEEK and
POKE instructions to manipulate the register file. When this is done, the stack pointer value will change but the values
in the address stack register will not be affected.
6.6 STACK OPERATION DURING SUBROUTINES, TABLE REFERENCES, AND INTERRUPTS
Stack operation during execution of each command is explained in 6.6.1 to 6.6.3.
6.6.1 Stack Operation during Subroutine Calls (CALL) and Returns (RET, RETSK)
Table 6-2 shows operation of the stack pointer (SP), address stack register, and the program counter (PC) during
execution of subroutine calls and returns.
37
CHAPTER 6 STACK
Table 6-2. Operation of the Stack Pointer during Execution
Instruction
CALL addr
Operation
<1> Stack pointer (SP) is decremented.
<2> Program counter (PC) is saved in the address stack register pointed to by the stack
pointer (SP).
<3> Value specified by the instruction operand (addr) is transferred to the program
counter.
RET
<1> Value in the address stack register pointed to by the stack pointer (SP) is restored
to the program counter (PC).
RETSK
<2> Stack pointer (SP) is incremented.
When the RETSK instruction is executed, the first command after data restoration becomes a no operation
instruction (NOP).
6.6.2 Stack Operation during Table Reference (MOVT DBF, @AR)
Table 6-3 shows stack operation during table reference.
Table 6-3. Stack Operation during Table Reference
Instruction
Instruction Cycle
Operation
MOVT DBF, @AR First
<1> Stack pointer (SP) is decremented.
<2> Program counter (PC) is saved in the address stack register
pointed to by the stack pointer (SP).
<3> Value in the address register (AR) is transferred to the program
counter (PC).
Second
<1> Contents of the program memory (ROM) pointed to by the pro-
gram counter (PC) is transferred to the data buffer (DBF).
<2> Value in the address stack register pointed to by the stack pointer
(SP) is restored to the program counter (PC).
<3> Stack pointer (SP) is incremented.
Remark As an exception, execution of MOVT DBF and @AR instructions require two instruction cycle.
38
CHAPTER 6 STACK
6.6.3 Executing RETI Instruction
Table 6-4 shows stack operation during interrupt receipt and RETI instruction execution.
Table 6-4. Stack Operation during Interrupt Receipt and Return
Instruction
Operation
<1> Stack pointer (SP) is decremented.
Receipt of interrupt
<2> Value in the program counter (PC) is saved in the address stack register pointed to
by the stack pointer (SP).
<3> Values in the PSWORD flags (BCD, CMP, CY, Z, IXE) are saved in the interrupt stack.
<4> Vector address is transferred to the program counter (PC)
RETI
<1> Values in the interrupt stack register are restored to the PSWORD (BCD, CMP, CY
Z, IXE).
<2> Values in the address stack register pointed to by the stack pointer (SP) is restored
to the program counter (PC).
<3> Stack pointer (SP) is incremented.
6.7 STACK NESTING LEVELS AND THE PUSH AND POP INSTRUCTIONS
During execution of operations such as subroutine calls and returns, the stack pointer (SP) simply functions as
a 3-bit counter which is incremented and decremented. When the value in the stack pointer is 0H and a CALL or
MOVT instruction is executed or an interrupt is received, the stack pointer is decremented to 7H. The µPD17120
subseries treats this condition as a fault and generates an internal reset signal.
In order to avoid this condition, when the address stack register is being used frequently, the PUSH and POP
instructions are used as necessary to save/return the address stack register.
Table 6-5 shows stack operation during the PUSH and POP instructions.
Table 6-5. Stack Operation during the PUSH and POP Instructions
Instruction
PUSH
Operation
<1> Stack pointer (SP) is decremented.
<2> Value in the address register (AR) is transferred to the address stack register pointed
to by the stack pointer (SP).
POP
<1> Value in the address stack register pointed to by the stack pointer (SP) is transferred
to the address register (AR).
<2> Stack pointer (SP) is incremented.
39
[MEMO]
40
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
The system register (SYSREG), located in data memory, is used for direct control of the CPU.
7.1 SYSTEM REGISTER CONFIGURATION
Figure 7-1 shows the allocation address of the system register in data memory. As shown in Figure 7-1, the system
register is allocated in addresses 74H to 7FH of data memory.
Because the system register is allocated in data memory, it can be manipulated using any of the instructions
available for manipulating data memory. Therefore, it is also possible to put the system register in the general register.
Figure 7-1. Allocation of System Register in Data Memory
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Data memory
(BANK0)
Port register
System register (SYSREG)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
41
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Figure 7-2 shows the configuration of the system register. As shown in Figure 7-2, the system register consists
of the following seven registers.
• Address register
(AR)
• Window register
(WR)
• Bank register
(BANK)
(IX)
• Index register
• Data memory row address pointer
• General register pointer
• Program status word
(MP)
(RP)
(PSWORD)
Figure 7-2. System Register Configuration
Address
Name
74H
75H
76H
77H
78H
79H
7AH
7BH
7CH
7DH
7EH
RPL
7FH
Index register
(IX)
General
Program
status
word
Window Bank
register register
(WR)
register
pointer
(RP)
Address register
(AR)
Data memory
row address
pointer (MP)
(BANK)
(PSWORD)
IXH
MPH
IXM
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
WR
BANK
IXL
RPH
PSW
Symbol
Bit
MPL
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
b
3
b
2
b
1
b
0
(IX)
M
P
E
B C C
C M Y Z X
D P
I
Data Note 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
(BANK)
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
(RP)
E
(AR)
(MP)
Initial value
Not
defined
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
when reset
Note Zeros in the columns indicates "0 fixed".
42
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.2 ADDRESS REGISTER (AR)
7.2.1 Address Register Configuration
Figure 7-3 shows the configuration of the address register.
As shown in Figure 7-3, the address register consists of the sixteen bits in address 74H to 77H (AR3 to AR0) of
the system register. However, because the six high-order bits are always set to 0, the address register is actually
10 bits. When the system is reset, all sixteen bits of the address register are reset to 0.
Figure 7-3. Address Register Configuration
Address
Name
74H
AR3
75H
76H
77H
AR0
Address register (AR)
Symbol
AR2
AR1
Bit
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
0
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
(AR)
Data
0
0
0
0
0
Initial value
when reset
0
0
0
0
7.2.2 Address Register Functions
The address register is used to specify an address in program memory when executing an indirect branch
instruction (BR @AR), indirect subroutine call (CALL @AR) or table reference (MOVT DBF, @AR). The address register
can also be put on and taken off the stack by using the stack manipulation instructions (PUSH AR, POP AR).
Items (1) to (4) explain address register operation during execution of each instruction.
The address register can be incremented by using the dedicated increment instruction (INC AR).
(1) Table reference (MOVT DBF, @AR)
When the MOVT DBF, @AR instruction is executed, the data in program memory (16-bit data) located at the
address specified by the value in the address register is read into the data buffer (addresses 0CH to 0FH of
BANK0).
43
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
(2) Stack manipulation instructions (PUSH AR, POP AR)
When the PUSH AR instruction is executed, the stack pointer (SP) is first decremented and then the address
register is stored in the address stack pointed to by the stack pointer.
When the POP AR instruction is executed, the contents of the address stack pointed to by the stack pointer
is transferred to the address register and then the stack pointer is incremented.
Also refer to CHAPTER 6.
(3) Indirect branch instruction (BR @AR)
When the BR @AR instruction is executed, the program branches to the address in program memory specified
by the value in the address register.
(4) Indirect subroutine call (CALL @AR)
When the CALL @AR instruction is executed, the subroutine located at the address in program memory
specified by the value in the address register is called.
(5) Address register used as peripheral register
The address register can be manipulated four bits at a time by using data memory manipulation instructions.
The address register can also be used as a peripheral register for transferring 16-bit data to the data buffer.
In other words, by using the PUT AR, DBF and GET DBF, AR instructions in addition to the data memory
manipulation instructions, the address register can be used to transfer 16-bit data to the data buffer.
Note that the data buffer is allocated in addresses 0CH to 0FH of BANK0 in data memory.
Figure 7-4. Address Register Used as a Peripheral Register
Column address
(BANK0)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DBF3 DBF2 DBF1 DBF0
Data buffer
AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0
System register
Address register
16-bit data transfer available
44
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.3 WINDOW REGISTER (WR)
7.3.1 Window Register Configuration
Figure 7-5 shows the configuration of the window register.
As shown in Figure 7-5, the window register (WR) consists of four bits allocated at address 78H of the system
register. The contents of the window register is undefined after a system reset. However, when RESET input is
used to release the system from HALT or STOP mode, the previous state of the window register is maintained.
Figure 7-5. Window Register Configuration
78H
Window register
WR
Address
Name
Symbol
Bit
b3
b2
b1
b0
Data
Not defined
Initial value when reset
7.3.2 Window Register Functions
The window register is used to transfer data to and from the register file (RF).
Data is transferred to and from the register file using the instructions PEEK WR, rf and POKE rf, WR. For details,
refer to 9.2.3 Register File Manipulation Instructions.
45
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.4 BANK REGISTER (BANK)
Figure 7-6 shows the configuration of the bank register.
The bank register consists of four bits at address 79H (BANK) of the system register.
Bank register is a register for switching the banks of RAM. However, since the µPD17120 subseries has only
one bank, every bank register bit is fixed to 0.
Figure 7-6. Bank Register Configuration
Address
Name
79H
Bank register
Symbol
BANK
Bit
b3
b2
b1
b0
0
0
0
0
Data
(BANK)
Initial value when reset
0
46
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.5 INDEX REGISTER (IX) AND DATA MEMORY ROW ADDRESS POINTER (Memory Pointer: MP)
7.5.1 Index Register (IX)
IX is used for address modification to data memory. It differs from MP in that its modification object is an address
that is specified as the bank or operand m.
As shown in Figure 7-7, IX is mapped to a total of 12 bits of system registers: 7AH (IXH), 7BH (IXM), and 7CH
(IXL). The index register enable flag (IXE) which enables address modification by IX is allocated to the lowest bit
of the PSW.
When IXE=1, an address in data memory specified with operand m is not m but the address indicated by the OR
of m, IXM and IXL. The bank specified at this time is that indicated by the OR of BANK and IXH.
Remark The IXH of the µPD17120 subseries is "fixed to 0" and therefore the bank is modified even when IXE=1
(thus preventing the bank from becoming other than 0).
7.5.2 Data Memory Row Address Pointer (Memory Pointer: MP)
MP is used for address modification to data memory. It differs from IX in that its modification object is the row
address of the address that is indirectly specified with the bank and operand @r.
As shown in Figure 7-7, MPH and IXH, and MPL and IXM, are respectively mapped to the same addresses (system
registers 7AH and 7BH). It is MPH's lower 3 bits and MPL's full 7 bits that are actually functioning as the MP. To
MPH's most significant bit is allocated the memory pointer enable flag (MPE) which enables address modification
by the MP.
When MPE=1, the bank and row address of the data memory indirectly specified with operand @r is not BANK
and mR but the address specified by the MP. (The column address is specified with the contents of r regardless
of the MPE.) At this time, MPH's lower 3 bits and MPL's most significant 4 bits point to BANK; and MPL's lower
3 bits point to the row address.
Remark The MPH's lower 3 bits and MPL's most significant bit in the µPD17120 subseries are "fixed to 0" and
therefore the bank is cleared to 0 even when MPE=1 (thus preventing the bank from becoming other
than 0).
47
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Figure 7-7. Index Register and Memory Pointer Configuration
Address
Name
7AH
7BH
7CH
7FH
Program status
word
(PSWORD)'S
lower 4 bits
Index register (IX)
Memory pointer (MP)
IXH
IXM
IXL
Symbol
name
PSW
MPH
MPL
Bit
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b1
b3 b2 b1 b0
M
P
E
I
X
E
Flag name
(IX)
(MP)
Data
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset-time value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 7-8. Data Memory Address Modification by Index Register and Memory Pointer
Data Memory Address Specified with m
Bank Row address Column address
Indirect Transfer Address Specified with @m
Bank Row address Column address
IXE
0
MPE
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
BANK
m
BANK
mR
(r)
(r)
0
1
MPH
MPL
Same as
above
0
BANK
IXH
m
BANK
Logical OR
mR
Logical OR
IXM
(r)
1
1
0
1
IXL
IXH
IXM
Setting disabled
BANK
IX
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Bank register
MP
MPE
MPH
MPL
r
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Memory pointer
Memory pointer enable flag
Index register
Index enable flag
IXE
IXH
IXM
IXL
m
Memory pointer's upper 3 bits
Memory pointer's lower 4 bits
General register column address
General register pointer
Index register's bits 10-8
Index register's bits 7-4
Index register's bits 3-0
RP
Data memory address indicated by mR, mC
Data memory row address
(×)
Contents addressed with ×
× : Direct address such as r
mR
mC
Data memory column address
48
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Table 7-1. Address-modified Instruction Statements
ADD
r, m
ADDC
------------------------------------------------------------
SUB
m, #n4
SUBC
AND
OR
r, m
XOR
------------------------------------------------------------
m, #n4
SKT
SKF
SKE
SKGE
SKLT
SKNE
LD
m, #n
m, #n4
r, m
m, r
ST
MOV
m, #n4
------------------------------------------------------------
@r, m
m, @r
49
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.5.3 MPE=0 and IXE=0 (No Data Memory Modification)
As shown in Figure 7-8, data memory addresses are not affected by the index register and the data memory row
address pointer.
(1) Data memory manipulation instructions
Example 1. General register is in row address 0
R003
MEM
MEM
ADD
0.03H
M061
0.61H
R003, M061
As shown in Figure 7-9, when the above instructions are executed, the data in general register
address R003 and data memory address M061 are added together and the result is stored
in general address R003.
(2) Indirect transfer of data in the general register (horizontal indirect transfer)
Example 2. General register is in row address 0
R005
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
0.05H
M034
0.34H
R005, #8
@R005, M034
; R005 ← 8
; Indirect transfer of data in the register
As shown in Figure 7-9, when the above instructions are executed, the data stored in data
memory address M034 is transferred to data memory location 38H.
In other words, the MOV @r, m instruction causes the contents in the data memory address
specified by m to be transferred to the data memory location specified by @r (which by
definition has the same row address as m).
The indirect data transfer address has the same row address as m (example above uses row
address 3) and the column address is the value contained in the general register address
specified by r (example above uses column address 8). Therefore the address in the above
example is 38H.
50
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Example 3. General register is in row address 0
R00B
M034
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
0.0BH
0.34H
R00B, #0EH
; R00B ← 0EH
M034, @R00B ; Indirect transfer of data in the register
As shown in Figure 7-9, when the above instructions are executed, the contents of data
memory stored at address 3EH is transferred to data memory location M034.
In other words, the MOV m, @r instruction causes the contents of the data memory location
specified by @r (which by definition has the same row address as m) to be transferred to the
data memory location specified by m.
The indirect data transfer address has the same row address as m (example above uses row
address is 3) and the column address is the value contained in the general register address
specified by r (example above uses column address 0EH). Therefore the address in the above
example is 3EH.
The data transfer memory address source and destination in this example are the opposite
of those shown in Example 2 (source and destination are switched).
Figure 7-9. Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
9
A
B
E
C
D
E
F
General
register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Column address specified
as transfer destination
Column address specified
as transfer source
Example 2. MOV @R005, M034
Example 1. ADD R003, M061
Example 3. MOV M034, @R00B
System register
Addresses in Example 1
Addresses in Example 2
ADD R003, M061
MOV @R005, M034
Row
Address Address
Column
Row
Address Address
Column
Bank
Bank
Data memory address M
General register address R
0000
0000
110
000
0001
0011
Data memory address M
General register address R
Indirect transfer address @R
0000
0000
0000
011
000
011
0100
0101
1000
Contents
of R
Same as M
51
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.5.4 MPE=1 and IXE=0 (Diagonal Indirect Data Transfer)
As shown in Figure 7-8, the indirect data transfer bank and row address specified by @r become the data memory
row address pointer value only when general register indirect data transfer instructions (MOV @r, m and MOV m,
@r) are used.
Example 1. When the general register is in row address 0
R005
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
0.05H
M034
0.34H
MPL, #0110B
R005, #8
; MP ← 6
; R005 ← 8
MPH, #1000B
@R005, M034
; MPE ← 1
; Indirect transfer of data in the register
As shown in Figure 7-10, when the above instructions are executed, the contents of data
memory address M034 is transferred to data memory location 68H.
When the MOV @r, m instruction is executed when MPE=1, the contents of the data memory
address specified by m is transferred to the column address pointed to by the row address
@r being pointed to by the memory pointer.
In this case, the indirect address specified by @r becomes the value used for the bank and
row address data memory pointer (above example uses row address 6). The column address
is the value in the general register address specified by r (above example uses column address
8).
Therefore the address in the above example is 68H.
This example is different from Example 2 in 7.5.3 when MPE=0 for the following reasons:
In this example, the data memory row address pointer is used to point to the indirect address
bank and row address specified by @r. (In Example 2 in 7.5.3 the indirect address bank and
row address are the same as m.)
By setting MPE=1, diagonal indirect data transfer can be performed using the general
register.
52
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Example 2. General register is in row address 0
R00B
M034
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
0.0BH
0.34H
MPL, #0110B
MPH, #1000B
R00B, #0EH
; MP ← 6
; MPE ← 1
; R00B ← 0EH
M034, @R00B ; Indirect transfer of data in the register
As shown in Figure 7-10, when the above instructions are executed, the data stored in address
6EH is transferred to data memory location M034.
Figure 7-10. Example of Operation When MPE=1 and IXE=0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
9
A
B
E
C
D
E
F
General
register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Column address specified Column address specified
as transfer destination as transfer source
Example 2. MOV M034, @R00B
Example 1. MOV @R005, M034
Memory
pointer
=00110B
System register
Addresses in Example 1
Addresses in Example 2
MOV @R005, M034
MOV, M034 @R00B
Row
Address Address
Column
Row
Address Address
Column
Bank
Bank
Data memory address M
General register address R
Indirect transfer address @R
0000
0000
0000
011
000
110
0100
0101
1000
Data memory address M
General register address R
Indirect transfer address @R
0000
0000
0000
011
000
110
0100
1011
1110
Contents
of R
Contents
of R
Contents of MP
Contents of MP
53
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.5.5 MPE=0 and IXE=1 (Index Modification)
As shown in Figure 7-8, when a data memory manipulation instruction is executed, any bank or address in data
memory specified by m can be modified using the index register.
When indirect data transfer using the general register (MOV @r, m or MOV m, @r) is executed, the indirect transfer
bank and address specified by @r can be modified using the index register.
Address modification is done by performing an OR operation on the data memory address and the index register.
The data memory manipulation instruction being executed manipulates data in the memory location pointed to by
the result of the operation (called the real address).
Examples are shown below.
Example 1. When the general register is in row address 0
R003
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
MOV
OR
0.03H
M061
0.61H
IXL, #0010B
IXM, #0001B
IXH, #0000B
PSW, #.DF.IXE AND 0FH
R003, M061
; IX ← 00000010010B
;
; MPE ← 0
; IXE← 1
ADD
As shown in Figure 7-11, when the instructions of Example 1 are executed, the value in data
memory address 73H (real address) and the value in general register address R003 (address
location 03H) are added together and the result is stored in general register address R003.
When the ADD r, m instruction is executed, the data memory address specified by m (address
61H in above example) is index modified.
Modification is done by performing an OR operation on data memory location M061 (address
61H, binary 00001100001B) and the index register (00000010010B in the above example).
The result of the operation (00001110011B) is used as a real address (address location 73H)
by the instruction being executed.
As compared to when IXE=0 (Examples in 7.5.3), in this example the data memory address
being directly specified by m is modified by performing an OR operation on m and the index
register.
54
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Figure 7-11. Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General
register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
R003
Example 1. ADD @R003, M061
Index modification
M061 : 00001100001B
OR) IX
: 00000010010B
Real address 00001110011B
M061
System register
Addresses in Example 1
ADD R003, M061
Row
Address Address
Column
Bank
Data memory address M
General register address R
Index modification M061
0000
0000
0000
BANK
0000
IXH
110
000
110
0001
0011
0001
m
IX
001
0010
IXL
IXM
Real address
(OR operation)
0000
111
0011
Instruction is executed using this address.
55
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Example 2. Indirect data transfer using the general register
Assume that the general register is row address 0.
R005
MEM
MEM
MOV
MOV
MOV
OR
0.05H
M034
0.34H
IXL, #0001B
IXM, #0000B
IXH, #0000B
;
;
;
IX ← 00000000001B
MPE ← 0
PSW, #.DF.IXE AND 0FH ; IXE ← 1
MOV
MOV
R005, #8
;
;
R005 ← 8
@R005, M034
Indirect data transfer using the
register
As shown in Figure 7-12, when the above instructions are executed, the contents of data
memory address 35H is transferred to data memory location 38H.
When the MOV @r, m instruction is executed when IXE=1, the data memory address
specified by m (direct address) is modified using the contents of the index register. The bank
and row address of the indirect address specified by @r are also modified using the index
register.
The bank, row address, and column address specified by m (direct address) are all modified,
and the bank and row address specified by @r (indirect address) are modified. Therefore,
in the above example the direct address is 35H and the indirect address is 38H. This example
is different from Example 3 in 7.5.3 when IXE=0 for the following reasons: In this example,
the bank, row address and column address of the direct address specified by m are modified
using the index register. The general register is transferred to the address specified by the
column address of the modified data memory address and the same row address. (In
Example 3 in 7.5.3 the direct address is not modified.)
56
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Figure 7-12. Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General
register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
R005
Column address specified
as transfer destination
M034
Example 2.
MOV @R005, M034
Indirect address
Direct
address
Index modification
M034 : 00000110100B
OR) IX : 00000000001B
Real address 00000110101B
System register
Example 3. Clearing all data memory (setting to 0)
M000
MEM
MOV
MOV
MOV
0.00H
IXL, #0
IXM, #0
IXH, #0
;
;
;
IX ← 0
MPE ← 0
IXE ← 1
LOOP:
OR
PSW, #.DF.IXE AND 0FH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
MOV
INC
M000, #0
IX
Set data memory specified by IX to 0
IX ← IX+1
AND
PSW, #1110B
IXE ← 0: IXE is set to 0 so that
address 7FH is not modified by IX.
Row address 7?
SKE
BR
IXM, #0111B
LOOP
If not 7 then LOOP (row address is
not cleared)
57
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
Example 4. Processing an array
As shown in Figure 7-13, to perform the operation:
A(N) = A(N) + 4 (0 ≤ N ≤ 15)
on the element A(N) of a one-dimensional array in which an element is 8 bits, the following
instructions are executed:
M000
M001
MOV
MOV
MOV
OR
MEM 0.00H
MEM 0.01H
IXH, #0
IXM, #N SHR 3
IXL, #N SHL 1 AND 0FH
;
;
Set the offset of the row address.
Set the offset of the column address.
PSW, #.DF.IXE AND 0FH ; IXE ← 1
ADD
ADDC
M000, #4
M001, #0
;
;
A(N) ← A(N) + 4
In the example above, because an element is 8 bits, the value resulting from left-shifting the
N's value by 1 bit is set for the index register.
Figure 7-13. Example of Operation When MPE=0 and IXE=1 (Array Processing)
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A (0)
A (8)
A (1)
A (9)
A (2)
A (3)
A (11)
A (4)
A (12)
A (5)
A (13)
A (6)
A (14)
A (7)
A (15)
A (10)
A (0)
00H
01H
b3
b2
b1
b0
b7
b6
b5
b4
System register
58
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.6 GENERAL REGISTER POINTER (RP)
7.6.1 General Register Pointer Configuration
Figure 7-14 shows the configuration of the general register pointer.
Figure 7-14. General Register Pointer Configuration
Address
Name
7DH
General register
7EH
pointer (RP)
Symbol
Bit
RPH
RPL
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
B
C
D
Flag
0
0
0
0
Data
(RP)
Initial value when reset
0
0
As shows in Figure 7-14, the general register pointer consists of seven bits; four bits in system register address
7DH (RPH) and the three high-order bits of system register address 7EH (RPL). However, because the four bits of
address 7DH are always set to 0, the register effectively consists of the three high-order bits of address 7EH.
All register bits are cleared to 0 at reset.
59
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.6.2 Functions of the General Register Pointer
The general register pointer is used to specify the location of the general register in data memory. For a more
detailed explanation, refer to CHAPTER 8 GENERAL REGISTER (GR).
The general register consists of sixteen nibbles in any single row of data memory. As shown in Figure 7-15, the
general register pointer is used to indicate which row address is being used as the general register.
Since the general register pointer effectively consists of three bits, the data memory row addresses in which the
general register can be placed are address locations 0H to 7H of BANK0. In other words, any row in data memory
can be specified as the general register.
With the general register allocated in data memory, data can be transferred to and from, and arithmetic/logical
operations can be performed on the general register and data memory.
Note that addresses 40H to 6EH are uninstalled memory locations and should therefore not be specified as
locations for the general register.
For example, when instructions such as
ADD r,m and LD r,m
are executed, instruction operand r can specify an address in the general register and m specifies an address in data
memory. In this way, operations like addition and data transfer can be performed on and between data memory
and the general register.
Figure 7-15. General Register Configuration
General register pointer
(RP)
RPH
RPL
BANK0
Column address
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Area in which
general register
can be specified
Example :
General
General register (16 nibbles)
register
Note
2
with
RPH=0000B
RPL=010×B
Note 1
BP
System register
Notes 1. These bits should not be specified in the case of the µPD17120 and 17121.
2. This bit is allocated to BCD flag.
60
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.7 PROGRAM STATUS WORD (PSWORD)
7.7.1 Program Status Word Configuration
Figure 7-16 shows the configuration of the program status word.
Figure 7-16. Program Status Word Configuration
Address
Name
7EH
7FH
Program status
word (PSWORD)
(RP)
RPL
Symbol
Bit
PSW
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
B
C
D
C
M
P
C
Y
Z
I
X
E
Data
Initial value when reset
0
0
As shown in Figure 7-16, the program status word consists of five bits; the least significant bit of system register
address 7EH (RPL) and all four bits of system register address 7FH (PSW).
The program status word is divided into the following 1-bit flags: Binary coded decimal flag (BCD), compare flag
(CMP), carry flag (CY), zero flag (Z), and the index enable flag (IXE).
All register bits are cleared to 0 at reset and at saved at interrupt stack register.
61
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.7.2 Functions of the Program Status Word
The flags of the program status word are used for setting conditions for arithmetic/logical operations and data
transfer instructions and for reflecting the status of operation results. Figure 7-17 shows an outline of the functions
of the program status word.
Figure 7-17. Outline of Functions of the Program Status Word
Address
Bit
7EH
7FH
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0
Symbol
RPL
PSW
B
C
C
Z
I
C M Y
X
E
Flag
D
P
Flag
IXE
Function of PSWORD
Used to specify that index modification be performed on the data
memory address used when a data memory manipulation instruction is
executed.
0: Index modification disabled.
1: Index modification enabled.
Set when the result of an arithmetic operation is 0.
0: Indicates that the result of the arithmetic operation is a value other
than 0.
Z
1: Indicates that the result of the arithmetic operation is 0.
Set when there is a carry in the result of an addition operation or a
borrow in the result of a subtraction operation.
0: Indicates there was no carry or borrow.
CY
1: Indicates there was a carry or borrow.
Used to specify that the result of an arithmetic operation not be stored
in data memory or the general register but just be reflected in the CY
and Z flags.
0: Results of arithmetic operations are stored.
1: Results of arithmetic operations are not stored.
CMP
BCD
Used to specify how arithmetic operations are performed.
0: Arithmetic operations are performed in 4-bit binary.
1: Arithmetic operations are performed in BCD.
62
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.7.3 Index Enable Flag (IXE)
The IXE flag is used to enable to modify index of the data memory address, whether index modification is to be
performed on the data memory address used.
For a more detailed explanation, refer to 7.5 INDEX REGISTER (IX) AND DATA MEMORY ROW ADDRESS
POINTER (MEMORY POINTER: MP).
7.7.4 Zero Flag (Z) and Compare Flag (CMP)
The Z flag indicates whether the result of an arithmetic operation is 0. The CMP flag is used to specify that the
result of an arithmetic operation not be stored in data memory or the general register.
Table 7-2 shows how the CMP flag affects the setting and resetting of the Z flag.
Table 7-2. Zero Flag (Z) and Compare Flag (CMP)
Condition
When CMP=0
When CMP=1
Z remains unchanged
Z ← 0
When the result of the arithmatical operation is 0
Z ← 1
When the result of the arithmetic operation is other than 0 Z ← 0
The Z and CMP flags are used to compare the contents of the general register with those of the data memory.
The Z flag does not change other than in arithmetic operations; the CMP flag does not change other than in bit
decisions.
Example of 12-bit data comparision
;
Is the 12-bit data stored in M001, M002, and M003 equivalent to 456H?
CMP456:
SET2
SUB
SUB
SUB
CMP, Z
M001, #4
M002, #5
M003, #6
CMP
; Data stored in M001, M002, and M003 are not
; damaged
;
; CLR1
SKT
BR
Z
; CMP is automatically cleared by the bit decision instruction
DIFFER
AGREE
; ≠ 456H
BR
; =456H
63
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.7.5 Carry Flag (CY)
The CY flag shows whether there is a carry in the result of an addition operation or a borrow in the result of a
subtraction operation.
The CY flag is set (CY=1) when there is a carry or borrow in the result and reset (CY=0) when there is no carry
or borrow in the result.
When the RORC r instruction (contents in the general register pointed to by r is shifted right one bit) is executed,
the following occurs: the value in the CY flag just before execution of the instruction is shifted to the most significant
bit of the general register and the least significant bit is shifted to the CY flag.
The CY flag is also useful for when the user wants to skip the next instruction when there is a carry or borrow
in the result of an operation.
The CY flag is only affected by arithmetic operations and rotations. Also, it is not affected by CMP flag.
7.7.6 Binary-Coded Decimal Flag (BCD)
The BCD flag is used to specify BCD operations.
When the BCD flag is set (BCD=1), all arithmetic operations will be performed in BCD. When the BCD flag is
reset (BCD=0), arithmetic operations are performed in 4-bit binary.
The BCD flag does not affect logical operations, bit evaluation, comparison evaluations or rotations.
7.7.7 Caution on Use of Arithmetic Operations on the Program Status Word
When performing arithmetic operations (addition and subtraction) on the program status word (PSWORD), the
following point should be kept in mind.
When an arithmetic operation is performed on the program status word and the result is stored in the program
status word.
Below is an example.
Example
MOV
ADD
PSW,
PSW,
#0001B
#1111B
When the above instructions are executed, a carry is generated which should cause bit 2 (CY flag)
of PSW to be set. However, the result of the operation (0000B) is stored in PSW, meaning that
CY does not get set.
64
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.8 CAUTIONS ON USE OF THE SYSTEM REGISTER
7.8.1 Reserved Words for Use with the System Register
Because the system register is allocated in data memory, it can be used in any of the data memory manipulation
instructions. As shown in Example 1 (using a 17K Series Assembler - AS17K), because a data memory address can
not be directly specified in an instruction operand, it needs to be defined as a symbol beforehand.
The system register is data memory, but has specialized functions which make it different from general-purpose
data memory. Because of this, the system register is used by defining it beforehand with symbols (used as reserved
words) in the assembler (AS17K).
Reserved words for use with the system register are allocated in address locations 74H to 7FH. They are defined
by the symbols (AR3, AR2, ..., PSW) shown in Figure 7-2.
As shown in Example 2, if these reserved words are used, it is not necessary to define symbols.
For information concerning reserved words, refer to CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS.
Example 1.
MOV
MOV
MEM
MOV
34H, #0101B
76H, #1010B
0.37H
;
;
;
;
Using a data memory address like 34H or 76H will
cause an error in the assembler.
M037
Addresses in general data memory need to be
definedassymbolsusingtheMEMpseudoinstruction.
M037, #0101B
2.
MOV
AR1, #1010B
;
;
;
;
By using the reserved word AR1 (address 76H),
there is no need to define the address as a symbol.
Reserved word AR1 is defined in a device file with
the pseudo instruction "AR1 MEM 0.76H".
Assembler AS17K has the below flag symbol handling instructions defined as macros.
SETn:
CLRn:
SKTn:
SKFn:
NOTn:
Set a flag to 1
Rest a flag to 0
Skip when all flags are 1
Skip when all flags are 0
Invert a flag
INITFLG: Initialize a flag
65
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
By using these macro instructions, data memory can be handled as flags as shown below in Example 3.
The functions of the program status word and the memory pointer enable flag are defined in bit units (flag units)
and each bit has a reserved word MPE, BCD, CMP, CY, Z and IXE defined for it.
If these flag reserved words are used, the incorporated macro instructions can be used as shown in Example
4.
Example 3. F0003
FLG 0.00.3
SET1 F0003
; Flag symbol definition
; Incorporated macro
Expanded macro
.MF.F0003 SHR 4, #.DF.F0003 AND 0FH
; Set bit 3 of address 00H of BANK0
OR
Example 4.
SET1 BCD
; Incorporated macro
Expanded macro
OR
.MF.BCD SHR 4, #.DF.BCD AND 0FH
; Set the BCD flag
; BCD is defined as "BCD FLG 0.7EH.0"
CLR2 Z, CY
; Identical address flag
Expanded macro
AND .MF.Z SHR 4, #.DF. (NOT (Z OR CY) AND 0FH)
CLR2 Z, BCD ; Different address flag
Expanded macro
AND .MF.Z SHR 4, #.DF. (NOT Z AND 0FH)
AND .MF.BCD SHR 4, #.DF. (NOT BCD AND 0FH)
66
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
7.8.2 Handling of System Register Addresses Fixed at 0
In dealing with system register addresses fixed at 0 (refer to Figure 7-2), there are a few points for which caution
should be taken with regard to device, emulator and assembler operation.
Items (1), (2) and (3) explain these points.
(1) Concerning device operation
Trying to write data to an address fixed at 0 will not change the value (0) at that address. Any attempt to
read an address fixed at 0 will result in the value 0 being read.
(2) When using a 17K series in-circuit emulator (IE-17K or IE-17K-ET)
An error will be generated if a write instruction attempts to write the value 1 to an address fixed at 0.
Below is an example of the type of instructions that will cause the in-circuit emulator to generate an error.
Example 1. MOV
BAMK, #0100B
;
Attempts to write the value 1 to bit 3 (an address fixed at 0).
2. MOV
MOV
IXL, #1111B
IXM, #1111B
IXH, #0001B
IXL, #1
;
;
;
;
;
;
MOV
ADD
ADDC IXM, #0
ADDC IXH, #0
However, when all valid bits are set to 1 as shown in Example 2, executing the instructions INC AR or INC IX
will not cause an error to be generated by the in-circuit emulator. This is because when all valid bits of the address
register and index register are set to 1, executing the INC instruction causes all bits to be set to 0.
The only time the in-circuit emulator will not generate an error when an attempt is made to write the value 1 to
a bit fixed at 0 is when the address being written to is in the address register.
67
CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYSREG)
(3) When using a 17K series assembler (AS17K)
No error is output when an attempt is made to write the value 1 to a bit fixed at 0. The instruction shown
in Example 1
MOV BANK, #0100B
will not cause an assembler error. However, when the instruction is executed in the in-circuit emulator, an
error is generated.
The assembler (AS17K) does not generate errors because it does not check the correspondence between
the symbol (including reserved words) and the data memory address which are the objects of the data memory
operation instruction. However, in the following case, the assembler generates an error:
When a value of 1 or more is given to "n" in the incorporation macro instruction "BANKn".
This is so because the assembler determine that no incorporation macro instructions other than BANK0 can
be used on the µPD17120 subseries.
68
CHAPTER 8 GENERAL REGISTER (GR)
The general register (GR) is allocated in data memory. It can therefore be used directly in performing arithmetic/
logical operations with and in transferring data to and from general data memory.
8.1 GENERAL REGISTER CONFIGURATION
Figure 8-1 shows the configuration of the general register.
As shown in Figure 8-1, sixteen nibbles in a single row address in data memory (16 × 4 bits) are used as the general
register.
The general register pointer (RP) in the system register is used to indicate which row address is to be used as
the general register. Because the RP effectively has three valid bits, the data memory row addresses in which the
general register can be allocated are address locations 0H to 7H. However, note that addresses 40H to 6EH are
uninstalled memory locations and should therefore not be specified as locations for the general register.
8.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE GENERAL REGISTER
The general register can be used in transferring data to and from data memory within an instruction. It can also
be used in performing arithmetic/logical operations with data memory within an instruction. In effect, since the
general register is data memory, this just means that operations such as arithmetic/logical operations and data transfer
can be performed on and between locations in data memory. In addition, because the general register is allocated
in data memory, it can be controlled in the same manner as other areas in data memory through the use of data
memory manipulation instructions.
69
CHAPTER 8 GENERAL REGISTER (GR)
Figure 8-1. General Register Configuration
BANK0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
General
General register (16 nibbles)
register
The general register
pointer (RP) can be used
to specify any row
address in address
locations 0H to 7H
when
RPH=0000B
RPL=010×B
System register
RP
Address
Name
7DH
7EH
General register pointer
(RP)
Symbol
Bits
RPH
RPL
b3 b2 b1 b0 b3 b2 b1 b0
B
C
D
Data
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
70
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
The register file is a register used mainly for specifying conditions for peripheral hardware.
9.1 REGISTER FILE CONFIGURATION
9.1.1 Configuration of the Register File
Figure 9-1 shows the configuration of the register file.
As shown in Figure 9-1, the register file is a register consisting of 128 nibbles (128 words × 4 bits).
In the same way as with data memory, the register file is divided into address in units of four bits. It has a total
of 128 nibbles specified in row addresses from 0H to 7H and column address from 0H to 0FH.
Address locations 00H to 3FH define an area the control register.
Figure 9-1. Register File Configuration
Column address
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
General register
9.1.2 Relationship between the Register File and Data Memory
Figure 9-2 shows the relationship between the register file and data memory.
As shown in Figure 9-2, the register file overlaps with data memory in addresses 40H to 7FH.
This means that the same memory exists in register file addresses 40H to 7FH and in data memory bank addresses
40H to 7FH.
71
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
Figure 9-2. Relationship Between the Register File and Data Memory
Column address
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Data memory
BANK0
System register
Port register
0
1
2
3
Control register
Register file
9.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE REGISTER FILE
9.2.1 Functions of the Register File
The register file is mainly used as a control register (a register called the control register is allocated in the register
file) for specifying conditions for peripheral hardware.
This control register is allocated within the register file at address location 00H to 3FH.
The rest of the register file (40H to 7FH) overlaps with data memory. As shown in 9.2.3, because of this overlap,
this area of the register file is the same as normal memory with one exception: The register file manipulation
instructions PEEK and POKE can be used with this area of memory but not with normal data memory.
9.2.2 Control Register Functions
The peripheral hardware whose conditions can be controlled by control registers is listed below.
For details concerning peripheral hardware and the control register, refer to the section for the peripheral hardware
concerned.
• Stack
• INT pin
• Power-on/power-down reset
• Timer
• Comparator
• General ports
• Interrupts
• Serial interface
72
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
9.2.3 Register File Manipulation Instructions
Reading and writing data to and from the register file is done using the window register (WR: address 78H) located
in the system register.
Reading and writing of data is performed using the following dedicated instructions:
PEEK WR, rf: Read the data in the address specified by rf and put it into WR.
POKE rf, WR: Write the data in WR into the address specified by rf.
Below is an example using the PEEK and POKE instructions.
Example
M030
M032
RF11
RF33
RF70
RF73
MEM
MEM
0.30H
0.32H
0.91H
0.B3H
0.70H
0.73H
;
;
;
;
;
;
Address 30H of the data memory is used as save area of WR.
Address 32H of the data memory is used as operation area of WR.
Symbol definition
MEM
MEM
Register file addresses 00H to 3FH must be defined with
symbols as BANK0 address 80H to BFH.
MEM
MEM
Refer to 9.4 NOTES ON USING THE REGISTER FILE for details.
; BANK0
PEEK
<1>
WR, RF11
;
CLR1
CLR1
OR
MPE
IXE
;
;
Shows the example of saving WR contents to the general data
memory (addresses 00H to 3FH). For example, it shows the
RPL, #0110B ; case of saving WR contents to address 30H of the data memory
<2>
LD
M030, WR
;
without address modification.
<3>
<4>
<5>
POKE
PEEK
POKE
RF73, WR
WR, RF70
RF33, WR
;
;
;
Data memory of addresses 40H to 7FH and control register can
transmit/receive data to/from WR directly by PEEK and POKE
instruction.
<6>
ST
WR, M032
;
73
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
Figure 9-3 shows an example of register file operation.
As shown in Figure 9-3, reading and writing of data to and from the control register (address locations 00H to 3FH)
is performed using the "PEEK WR, rf" and "POKE rf, WR" instructions. Data within the control register specified using
rf can be read from and written to the control register, only by using these instructions with the window register.
The fact that the register file overlaps with data memory in addresses 40H to 7FH has the following effect: When
a "PEEK WR, rf" or "POKE rf, WR" instruction is executed, the effect is the same as if they were being executed on
the data memory address (in the current bank) specified by rf.
Addresses 40H to 7FH of the register file can be operated by normal memory manipulation instructions.
Control registers can be manipulated in 1-bit unit by using built-in macro instruction.
Figure 9-3. Accessing the Register File Using the PEEK and POKE Instructions
BANK0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
Data memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
<6> ST WR, M032
M030, WR
<2> LD
<3> POKE RF73, WR
<4> PEEK WR, RF70
WR
System register
0
1
2
3
<1> PEEK WR, RF11
<5> POKE RF33, WR
Control register
Register file
74
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
9.3 CONTROL REGISTER
The control register consists of 64 nibbles (64 × 4 bits) allocated in register file address locations 00H to 3FH.
Of these nibbles, only 17 nibbles are actually used in the µPD17120 and 17121, and 20 nibbles are used in the
µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133.
There are two types of registers, both of which occupy one nibble of memory. One type is read/write (R/W), and
the other is read-only (R).
Note that within the read/write (R/W) flags, there exists a flag that will always be read as 0.
The following read/write (R/W) flags are those flags which will always be read as 0:
• TMRES
(RF: 11H, bit 2)
Within the four bits of data in a nibble, there are bits which are fixed at 0 and will therefore always be read as
0. These bits remain fixed at 0 even when an attempt is made to write to them.
Attempting to read data in the unused register address area will yield unpredictable values. In addition, attempting
to write to this area has no effect.
Concerning the configuration of control register, refer to Figures 19-1 and 19-2.
9.4 CAUTIONS ON USING THE REGISTER FILE
9.4.1 Concerning Operation of the Control Register (Read-Only and Unused Registers)
It is necessary to take note of the following notes concerning device operation and use of the 17K Series assembler
(AS17K) and in-circuit emulator (IE-17K or IE-17K-ET) with regard to the read-only (R) and unused registers in the
control register (register file address locations 00H to 3FH).
(1) Device operation
Writing to a read-only register has no effect.
Attempting to read data from an address in the unused data area will yield an unpredictable value. Attempting
to write to an address in the unused data area has no effect.
(2) During use of the assembler (AS17K)
An error will be generated if an attempt is made to write to a read-only register.
An error will also be generated if an attempt is made to read from or write to an address in the unused data
area.
75
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
(3) During use of the in-circuit emulator (IE-17K or IE-17K-ET) (operation during patch processing and
similar operations)
Attempting to write to a read-only register has no effect and no error is generated.
Attempting to read data from an address in the unused data area will yield an unpredictable value.
Attempting to write to an address in the unused data area has no effect and no error is generated.
9.4.2 Register File Symbol Definitions and Reserved Words
Attempting to use a numerical value in a 17K Series assembler (AS17K) to specify a register file address in the
rf operand of the PEEK WR, rf or POKE rf, WR instructions will cause an error to be generated.
Therefore, as shown in Example 1, register file addresses need to be defined beforehand as symbols.
Example 1. Case which causes and error to be generated
PEEK
WR, 02H
;
;
POKE 21H, WR
Case in which no error is generated
RF71
MEM
PEEK
0.71H
; Symbol definition
;
WR, RF71
Caution should especially be taken with regard to the following point:
• When using a symbol to define the control register as an address in data memory, it needs to be defined as
addresses 80H to BFH of BANK0.
Since the control register is manipulated using the window register, any attempt to manipulate the control register
other than by using the PEEK and POKE commands needs to cause an error to be generated in the assembler (AS17K).
However, note that any address in the area of the register file overlapping with data memory (address locations
40H to 7FH) can be defined as a symbol in the same manner as with normal data memory.
An example is given below.
Example 2. RF71
MEM
MEM
0.71H
0.82H
; Address in register file overlapping with data memory
; Control register
RF02
PEEK
PEEK
WR, RF71 ; RF71 becomes address 71H
WR, RF02 ; RF02 becomes address 02H in the control register.
76
CHAPTER 9 REGISTER FILE (RF)
The assembler (AS17K) has the below flag symbol handling instructions defined internally as macros.
SETn:
CLRn:
SKTn:
SKFn:
NOTn:
Set a flag to 1
Reset a flag to 0
Skip when all flags are 1
Skip when all flags are 0
Invert a flag
INITFLG: Initialize a flag (data setting per 4 bits)
By using these incorporated macro instructions, the contents of the register file can be manipulated one bit at
a time.
Due to the fact that most of control register consists of 1-bit flags, the assembler (AS17K) has reserved words
(predefined symbols) for use with these flags.
However, note that there is no reserved word for the stack pointer for its use as a flag. The reserved word used
for the stack pointer is "SP", for its use as data memory. For this reason, none of the above flag manipulation
instructions using reserved words can be used for the stack pointer.
77
[MEMO]
78
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)
The data buffer consists of four nibbles allocated in addresses 0CH to 0FH in BANK0.
The data buffer is used as a data storage area when data is transferred to/from the CPU peripheral circuit (address
register, serial interface, and timer) by the GET and PUT instructions. By using the MOVT DBF, and @AR instructions,
fixed data in program memory can be read into the data buffer.
10.1 DATA BUFFER CONFIGURATION
Figure 10-1 shows the allocation of the data buffer in data memory.
As shown in Figure 10-1, the data buffer is allocated in address locations 0CH to 0FH in BANK0 and consists of
a total of 16 bits (4 × 4 bits).
Figure 10-1. Allocation of the Data Buffer
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Data buffer
(DBF)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Data memory
BANK0
System register (SYSREG)
Figure 10-2 shows the configuration of the data buffer. As shown in Figure 10-2, the data buffer is made up of
sixteen bits with its least significant bit in bit 0 of address 0FH and its most significant bit in bit 3 of address 0CH.
79
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)
Figure 10-2. Data Buffer Configuration
Address
Bit
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
Data memory
BANK0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b8
b3
b2
b6
b1
b5
b0
b4
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b0
Bit
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9
b7
b3
Symbol
DBF3
DBF2
Data
DBF1
DBF0
Data buffer
M
S
L
S
B
Data
B
Because the data buffer is allocated in data memory, it can be used in any of the data memory manipulation
instructions.
10.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE DATA BUFFER
The data buffer has two separate functions.
The data buffer is used for data transfer with peripheral hardware. The data buffer is also used for reading constant
data in program memory. Figure 10-3 shows the relationship between the data buffer and peripheral hardware.
Figure 10-3. Relationship Between the Data Buffer and Peripheral Hardware
Data buffer
(DBF)
Peripheral
address
Peripheral hardware
Internal bus
01H
Shift register (SIOSFR)
Timer count register
(TMC)
02H
03H
40H
Program memory (ROM)
Constant data
Timer modulo register
(TMM)
Address register (AR)
80
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)
10.2.1 Data Buffer and Peripheral Hardware
Table 10-1 shows data transfer with peripheral hardware using the data buffer.
Each unit of peripheral hardware has an individual address (called its peripheral address). By using this peripheral
address and the dedicated instructions GET and PUT, data can be transferred between each unit of peripheral
hardware and the data buffer.
GET DBF, p : Read the data in the peripheral hardware address specified by p into the data buffer (DBF).
PUT p, DBF: Write the data in the data buffer to the peripheral hardware address specified by p.
There are three types of peripheral hardware units: read/write (PUT/GET), write-only (PUT) and read-only (GET).
The following describes what happens when a GET instruction is used with write-only hardware (PUT only) and
when a PUT instruction is used with read-only hardware (GET only).
• Reading (GET) from write-only (PUT only) peripheral hardware will yield an unpredictable value.
• Writing (PUT) to read-only (GET only) peripheral hardware has no effect (regarded as a NOP instruction).
Table 10-1. Peripheral Hardware
(1) Peripheral hardware with input/output in 8-bit units
Direction of Data
Peripheral
Address
Effective Bit
Length
Name
Peripheral Hardware
PUT
●
GET
●
01H
02H
03H
SIOSFR
TMC
Shift register
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Timer count register
Timer modulo register
×
●
TMM
●
×
(2) Peripheral hardware with input/output in 16-bit units
Direction of Data
Peripheral
Effective Bit
Length
Name
AR
Peripheral Hardware
Address
PUT
GET
40H
Address register
●
●
10 bits
81
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)
10.2.2 Data Transfer with Peripheral Hardware
Data can be transferred between the data buffer and peripheral hardware in 8- or 16-bit units. Instruction cycle
for a single PUT or GET instruction is the same regardless of whether eight or sixteen bits are being transferred.
Example 1. PUT instruction (when the effective bits in peripheral hardware are the 8 bits from 7 to 0)
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
Data buffer
Don't care
Don't care
b7
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
b0
PUT
Data in peripheral
hardware
Effective bits
When only eight bits of data are being written from the data buffer, the upper eight bits of the data
buffer (DBF3, DBF2) are irrelevant.
Example 2. GET instruction (when the effective bits in peripheral hardware are the 8 bits from 7 to 0)
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
Data buffer
Retained
Retained
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
GET
Data in peripheral
hardware
Effective bits
b7
b0
When only eight bits of data are being read into the data buffer, the values in the upper eight bits
of the data buffer (DBF3, DBF2) remain unchanged.
82
CHAPTER 10 DATA BUFFER (DBF)
10.2.3 Table Reference
By using the MOVT instruction, constant data in program memory (ROM) can be read into the data buffer.
The MOVT instruction is explained below.
MOVT DBF, @AR: The contents of the program memory being pointed to by the address register (AR) is read
into the data buffer (DBF).
Date buffer
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
Program memory (ROM)
16 bits
MOVT DBF, @AR
b15
b0
83
[MEMO]
84
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
The ALU is used for performing arithmetic operations, logical operations, bit evaluations, comparison evaluations,
and rotations on 4-bit data.
11.1 ALU BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Figure 11-1 shows the configuration of the ALU block.
As shown in Figure 11-1, the ALU block consists of the main 4-bit data processor, temporary registers A and B,
the status flip-flop for controlling the status of the ALU, and the decimal conversion circuit for use during arithmetic
operations in BCD.
As shown in Figure 11-1, the status flip-flop consists of the following flags: Zero flag FF, carry flag FF, compare
flag FF, and the BCD flag FF.
Each flag in the status flip-flop corresponds directly to a flag in the program status word (PSWORD: addresses
7EH, 7FH) located in the system register. The flags in the program status word are the following: Zero flag (Z), carry
flag (CY), compare flag (CMP), and the BCD flag (BCD).
11.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE ALU BLOCK
Arithmetic operations, logical operations, bit evaluations, comparison evaluations, and rotations are performed
using the instructions in the ALU block. Table 11-1 lists each arithmetic/logical instruction, evaluation instruction,
and rotation instruction.
By using the instructions listed in Table 11-1, 4-bit arithmetic/logical operations, evaluations and rotations can be
performed in a single instruction. Arithmetic operations in decimal can also be performed in a single instruction.
11.2.1 Functions of the ALU
The arithmetic operations consists of addition and subtraction. Arithmetic operations can be performed on the
contents of the general register and data memory or on immediate data and the contents of data memory. Operations
in binary are performed on four bits of data operations in decimal are performed on one place (BCD operation).
Logical operations include ANDing, ORing, and XORing. Their operands can be general register contents and data
memory contents, or data memory contents and immediate data.
Bit evaluation is used to determine whether bits in 4-bit data in data memory are 0 or 1.
Comparison evaluation is used to compare contents of data memory with immediate data. It is used to determine
whether one value is equal to or greater than the other, less than the other, or if both values are equal or not equal.
Rotation is used to shift 4-bit data in the general register one bit in the direction of its least significant bit (rotation
to the right).
85
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Figure 11-1. Configuration of the ALU
Data bus
Temporary
register A
Temporary
register B
Status
flip-flop
ALU
• Arithmetic operations
• Logical operations
• Bit evaluations
•Comparison
evaluations
•Rotations
Decimal con-
version circuit
Address
7EH
7FH
Program status word
(PSWORD)
Name
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
Bit
BCD
CMP
CY
Z
IXE
Flag
Status flip-flop
BCD
flag
FF
CMP
flag
FF
CY
flag
FF
Z
flag
FF
Function outline
Indicates when the result of an arithmetic
operation is 0.
Stores the borrow or carry from an arithmetic
operation.
Used to indicate whether to store the result
of an arithmetic operation.
Used to indicate whether to perform
decimal correction for arithmetic operations.
86
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
[MEMO]
87
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Table 11-1. List of ALU Instructions (1/2)
ALU Functions
Instruction
ADD r, m
Operation
Explanation
Arith-
Addi-
tion
(r) ← (r) + (m)
Adds contents of general register and data memory.
Result is stored in general register.
metic
opera-
tions
ADD m, #n4
ADDC r, m
ADDC m, #n4
SUB r, m
(m) ← (m) + n4
(r) ← (r) + (m) + CY
(m) ← (m) + n4 + CY
(r) ← (r) – (m)
Adds immediate data to contents of data memory.
Result is stored in data memory.
Adds contents of general register, data memory and
carry flag. Result is stored in general register.
Adds immediate data, contents of data memory and
carry flag. Result is stored in data memory.
Sub-
traction
Subtracts contents of data memory from contents of
general register. Result is stored in general register.
SUB m, #n4
SUBC r, m
(m) ← (m) – n4
Subtracts immediate data from data memory. Result
is stored in data memory.
(r) ← (r) – (m) – CY
Subtracts contents of data memory and carry flag from
contents of general register. Result is stored in general
register.
SUBC m, #n4
OR r, m
(m) ← (m) – n4 – CY
(r) ← (r) (m)
Subtracts immediate data and carry flag from data
memory. Result is stored in data memory.
Logical Logical
OR operation is performed on contents of general
register and data memory. Result is stored in general
register.
opera-
tions
OR
OR m, #n4
AND r, m
(m) ← (m) n4
(r) ← (r) (m)
(m) ← (m) n4
(r) ← (r) (m)
(m) ← (m) n4
OR operation is performed on immediate data and
contents of data memory. Result is stored in data
memory.
Logical
AND
AND operation is performed on contents of general
register and data memory. Result is stored in general
register.
AND m, #n4
XOR r, m
XOR m, #n4
SKT m, #n
AND operation is performed on immediate data and
contents of data memory. Result is stored in data
memory.
XOR operation is performed on contents of general
register and data memory. Result is stored in general
register.
Logical
XOR
XOR operation is performed on immediate data and
contents of data memory. Result is stored in data
memory.
Bit
TRUE
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=n,
then skip
Skips next instruction if all bits in data memory
specified by n are TRUE (1). Result is not stored.
judge-
ment
FALSE SKF m, #n
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=0,
then skip
Skips next instruction if all bits in data memory
specified by n are FALSE (0). Result is not stored.
Com-
Equal
SKE m, #n4
SKNE m, #n4
SKGE m, #n4
(m) – n4, skip if zero
Skips next instruction if immediate data equals
contents of data memory. Result is not stored.
parison
judge-
ment
Not
equal
(m) – n4, skip if not zero
(m) – n4, skip if not borrow
Skips next instruction if immediate data is not equal
to contents of data memory. Result is not stored.
≥
Skips next instruction if contents of data memory is
greater than or equal to immediate data. Result is
not stored.
<
SKLT m, #n4
RORC r
(m) – n4, skip if borrow
Skips next instruction if contents of data memory is
less than immediate data. Result is not stored.
Rotate
to the
right
Rotation
Rotate contents of the general register along with
the CY flag to the right. Result is stored in general
register.
CY→(r)b3→(r)b2→(r)b1→(r)b0
88
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Table 11-1. List of ALU Instructions (2/2)
ALU Function
Operational Variance Depending on Program Status Word (PSWORD)
Arithmetic
Operation
Modifica-
tion by
IXE=1
BCD flag's
value
Operating
action
CMP flag's
value
CY flag
Set if a
Z flag
The binary
operation result
is stored.
Set if the operation result is
0000B; reset otherwise.
0
0
1
0
1
0
carry or
borrow is
generated;
reset
The binary
The status is retained if the
operation result is 0000B;
reset otherwise.
operation result
is not stored.
Yes
otherwise.
The BCD
operation result
is stored.
Set if the operation result is
0000B; reset otherwise.
The BCD
The status is retained if the
operation result is 0000B;
reset otherwise.
1
1
operation result
is not stored.
Logical
Operation
Don't care Don't care
Don't care
(Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Unchanged
Yes
(Held)
(Held)
Bit
Judgement
Don't care
(Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Is reset
Unchanged
Unchanged
Yes
Yes
Comparison
Judgement
Don't care Don't care
(Held) (Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Rotation
General
register
b0's value
Don't care Don't care
(Held) (Held)
Don't care
(Held)
Unchanged
Yes
89
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.2.2 Functions of Temporary Registers A and B
Temporary registers A and B are needed for processing of 4-bit data. These registers are used for temporary
storage of the first and second data operands of an instruction.
11.2.3 Functions of the Status Flip-flop
The status flip-flop is used for controlling operation of the ALU and for storing data which has been processed.
Each flag in the status flip-flop corresponds directly to a flag in the program status word (PSWORD) located in the
system register. This means that when a flag in the system register is manipulated it is the same as manipulating
a flag in the status flip-flop. Each flag in the program status word is described below.
(1) Z flag
This flag is set (1) when the result of an arithmetic operation is 0000B, otherwise it is reset (0). However,
as described below, depending on the status of the CMP flag, the conditions which cause this flag to be set
(1) can be changed.
(i) When CMP=0
Z flag is set (1) when the result of an arithmetic operation is 0000B, otherwise it is reset (0).
(ii) When CMP=1
The previous state of the Z flag is maintained when the result of an arithmetic operation is 0000B,
otherwise it is reset (0). Only affected by arithmetic operations.
(2) CY flag
This flag is set (1) when a carry or borrow is generated in the result of an arithmetic operation, otherwise
it is reset (0).
When an arithmetic operation is being performed using a carry or borrow, the operation is performed using
the CY flag as the least significant bit. When a rotation (RORC instruction) is performed, the contents of the
CY flag becomes the most significant bit (bit b3) of the general register and the least significant bit of the
general register is stored in the CY flag.
Only affected by arithmetic operations and rotations.
90
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
(3) CMP flag
When the CMP flag is set (1), the result of an arithmetic operation is not stored in either the general register
or data memory.
When the bit evaluation instruction is performed, the CMP flag is reset (0).
The CMP flag does not affect comparison evaluations, logical operations, or rotations.
(4) BCD flag
When the BCD flag is set (1), decimal correction is performed for all arithmetic operations. When the flag
is reset (0), decimal correction is not performed.
The BCD flag does not affect logical operations, bit evaluations, comparison evaluations, or rotations.
These flags can also be set through direct manipulation of the values in the program status word. When the flags
in the program status word are manipulated, the corresponding flag in the status flip-flop is also manipulated.
11.2.4 Performing Operations in 4-Bit Binary
When the BCD flag is set to 0, arithmetic operations are performed in 4-bit binary.
11.2.5 Performing Operations in BCD
When the BCD flag is set to 1, decimal correction is performed for arithmetic operations performed in 4-bit binary.
Table 11-2 shows the differences in the results of operations performed in 4-bit binary and in BCD. When the result
of an addition after decimal correction is equal to or greater than 20, or the result of a subtraction after decimal
correction is outside of the range –10 to +9, a value of 1010B (0AH) or higher is stored as the result (shaded area
in Table 11-2).
91
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Table 11-2. Results of Arithmetic Operations Performed in 4-Bit Binary and BCD
Addition in
4-bit Binary
Addition in
BCD
Subtraction in Subtraction in
4-bit Binary
BCD
Operation
Result
Operation
Result
Operation
Operation
Operation
Operation
Result
CY
CY
CY
CY
Result
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Result
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Result
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1110
1111
1100
1101
1110
1111
1100
1101
1010
1011
1100
1101
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1100
1101
1110
1111
1100
1101
1110
1111
1100
1101
1110
1111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
–16
–15
–14
–13
–12
–11
–10
–9
–8
–7
–6
–5
–4
–3
–2
–1
92
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.2.6 Performing Operations in the ALU Block
When arithmetic operations, logical operations, bit evaluations, comparison evaluations or rotations in a program
are executed, the first data operand is stored in temporary register A and the second data operand is stored in
temporary register B.
The first data operand is four bits of data used to specify the contents of an address in the general register or
data memory. The second data operand is four bits of data used to either specify the contents of an address in data
memory or to be used as an immediate value. For example, in the instruction
ADD r, m
Second data operand
First data operand
the first data operand, r, is used to specify the contents of an address in the general register. The second data operand,
m, is used to specify the contents of an address in data memory. In the instruction
ADD m, #n4
the first data operand, m, is used to specify an address in data memory. The second operand, #n4, is immediate
data. In the rotation instruction
RORC r
only the first data operand, r (used to specify the contents of an address in the general register) is used.
Next, using the data stored in temporary registers A and B, the ALU executes the operation specified by the
instruction (arithmetic operation, logical operation, bit evaluation, comparison evaluation, or rotation). When the
instruction being executed is an arithmetic operation, logical operation, or rotation, the data processed by the ALU
is stored in the location specified by the first data operand (general register address or data memory address) and
the operation terminates. When the instruction being executed is a bit evaluation or comparison evaluation, the result
processed by the ALU is used to determine whether or not to skip the next instruction (whether to treat next
instruction as a no operation instruction: NOP) and the operation terminates.
93
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Caution should be taken with regard to the following points:
(1) Arithmetic operations are affected by the CMP and BCD flags in the program status word.
(2) Logical operations are not affected by the CMP or BCD flag in the program status word. Logical operations
do not affect the Z or CY flags.
(3) Bit evaluation causes the CMP flag in the program status word to be reset.
(4) When an arithmetic operation, logical operation, bit evaluation, comparison evaluation, or rotation is being
executed and the IXE flag in the program status word is set (1), address modification is performed using the
index register.
11.3 ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS (ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION IN 4-BIT BINARY AND BCD)
As shown in Table 11-3, arithmetic operations consist of addition, subtraction, addition with carry, and subtraction
with borrow. These instructions are ADD, ADDC, SUB, and SUBC.
The ADD, ADDC, SUB, and SUBC instructions are further divided into addition and subtraction of the general
register and data memory and addition and subtraction of data memory and immediate data. When the operands
r and m are used, addition or subtraction is performed using the general register and data memory. When the
operands m and #n4 are used, addition or subtraction is performed using data memory and immediate data.
Arithmetic operations are affected by the status flip-flop and the program status word (PSWORD) in the system
register. The BCD flag in the program status word is used to specify whether arithmetic operations are to be
performed in 4-bit binary or in BCD. The CMP flag is used to specify whether or not the results of arithmetic operations
are to be stored.
11.3.1 to 11.3.4 explain the relationship between each command and the program status word.
Table 11-3. Types of Arithmetic Operations
Arithmetic Addition
operation
Without carry ADD
With carry ADDC
General register and data memory
Data memory and immediate data
General register and data memory
Data memory and immediate data
ADD r, m
ADD m, #n4
ADDC r, m
ADDC m, #n4
SUB r, m
Subtraction Without borrow SUB General register and data memory
Data memory and immediate data
SUB m, #n4
SUBC r, m
SUBC m, #n4
With borrow SUBC
General register and data memory
Data memory and immediate data
94
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.3.1 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=0 and BCD=0
Addition and subtraction are performed in 4-bit binary and the result is stored in the general register or data
memory.
When the result of the operation is greater than 1111B (carry generated) or less than 0000B (borrow generated),
the CY flag is set (1); otherwise it is reset (0).
When the result of the operation is 0000B, the Z flag is set (1) regardless of whether there is carry or borrow;
otherwise it is reset (0).
11.3.2 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=1 and BCD=0
Addition and subtraction are performed in 4-bit binary.
However, because the CMP flag is set (1), the result of the operation is not stored in either the general register
or data memory.
When there is a carry or borrow in the result of the operation, the CY flag is set (1); otherwise it is reset (0).
When the result of the operation is 0000B, the previous state of the Z flag is maintained; otherwise it is reset
(0).
11.3.3 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=0 and BCD=1
BCD operations are performed.
The result of the operation is stored in the general register or data memory. When the result of the operation
is greater than 1001B (9D) or less than 0000B (0D), the carry flag is set (1), otherwise it is reset (0).
When the result of the operation is 0000B (0D), the Z flag is set (1), otherwise it is reset (0).
Operations in BCD are performed by first computing the result in binary and then by using the decimal conversion
circuit to convert the result to decimal. For information concerning the binary to decimal conversion, refer to Table
11-2.
In order for operations in BCD to be performed properly, note the following:
(1) Result of an addition must be in the range 0D to 19D.
(2) Result of a subtraction must be in the range 0D to 9D, or in the range –10D to –1D.
The following shows which value is considered the CY flag in the range 0D to 19D (shown in 4-bit binary):
0, 0000B to 1, 0011B
CY
CY
The following shows which value is considered the CY flag in the range –10D to –1D (shown in 4-bit binary):
1, 0110B to 1, 1111B
CY
CY
When operations in BCD are performed outside of the limits of (1) and (2) stated above, the CY flag is set
(1) and the result of operation is output as a value greater than or equal to 1010B (0AH).
95
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.3.4 Addition and Subtraction When CMP=1 and BCD=1
BCD operations are performed.
The result is not stored in either the general register or data memory.
In other words, the operations specified by CMP=1 and BCD=1 are both performed at the same time.
Example MOV
RPL, #0001B
PSW, #1010B
; Sets the BCD flag (BCD=1).
MOV
; Sets the CMP and Z flag (CMP=1, Z=1) and resets the CY flag
; (CY=0).
; <1>
SUB
M1, #0001B
M2, #0010B
M3, #0011B
SUBC
SUBC
; <2>
; <3>
By executing the instructions in steps numbered <1>, <2>, and <3>, the twelve bits in memory
locations M1, M2, and M3 and the immediate data (321) can be compared in decimal.
11.3.5 Cautions on Use of Arithmetic Operations
When performing arithmetic operations with the program status word (PSWORD), caution should be taken with
regard to the result of the operation being stored in the program status word.
Normally, the CY and Z flags in the program status word are set (1) or reset (0) according to the result of the
arithmetic operation being executed. However, when an arithmetic operation is performed on the program status
word itself, the result is stored in the program status word. This means that there is no way to determine if there
is a carry or borrow in the result of the operation nor if the result of the operation is zero.
However, when the CMP flag is set (1), results of arithmetic operations are not stored. Therefore, even in the
above case, the CY and Z flags will be properly set (1) or reset (0) according to the result of the operation.
11.4 LOGICAL OPERATIONS
As shown in Table 11-4, logical operations consist of logical OR, logical AND, and logical XOR. Accordingly, the
logical operation instructions are OR, AND, and XOR.
The OR, AND, and XOR instructions can be performed on either the general register and data memory, or on data
memory and immediate data. The operands of these instructions are specified in the same way as for arithmetic
operations ("r, m" or "m, #n4").
Logical operations are not affected by the BCD or CMP flags in the program status word (PSWORD). Logical
operations do not cause either the CY or Z flag in the program status word (PSWORD) to be set. However, when
the index enable flag (IXE) is set (1), index modification is performed using the index register.
96
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Table 11-4. Logical Operations
Logical
Logical OR
Logical AND
Logical XOR
General register and data memory OR r, m
operation
Data memory and immediate data OR m, #n4
General register and data memory AND r, m
Data memory and immediate data AND m, #n4
General register and data memory XOR r, m
Data memory and immediate data XOR m, #n4
Table 11-5. Table of True Values for Logical Operations
Logical AND
Logical OR
C=A OR B
Logical XOR
C=A XOR B
C=A AND B
A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
C
0
0
0
1
A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
C
0
1
1
1
A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
C
0
1
1
0
11.5 BIT JUDGEMENT
As shown in Table 11-6, there are both TRUE (1) and FALSE (0) bit judgement instructions.
The SKT instruction skips the next instruction when a bit is judged as TRUE (1) and the SKF instruction skips the
next instruction when a bit is judged as FALSE (0).
The SKT and SKF instructions can only be used with data memory.
Bit judgement are not affected by the BCD flag in the program status word (PSWORD) and bit judgements do
not cause either the CY or Z flag in the program status word (PSWORD) to be set. However, when an SKT or SKF
instruction is executed, the CMP flag is reset (0). When the index enable flag (IXE) is set (1), index modification is
performed using the index register. For information concerning index modification using the index register, refer
to CHAPTER 7 SYSTEM REGISTER (SYS REG).
11.5.1 and 11.5.2 explain TRUE (1) and FALSE (0) bit judgements.
Table 11-6. Bit Judgement Instructions
Bit judgement
TRUE (1) bit judgement
SKT m, #n
FALSE (0) bit judgement
SKF m, #n
97
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.5.1 TRUE (1) Bit Judgement
The TRUE (1) bit judgement instruction (SKT m, #n) is used to determine whether or not the bits specified by n
in the four bits of data memory m are TRUE (1). When all bits specified by n are TRUE (1), this instruction causes
the next instruction to be skipped.
Example MOV
M1,
M1,
A
#1011B
#1011B
SKT
BR
; <1>
; <2>
BR
B
SKT
BR
M1,
C
#1101B
BR
D
In this example, bit 3, 1, and 0 of data memory M1 are judged in step number <1>. Because all the
bits are TRUE (1), the program branches to B. In step number <2>, bits 3, 2 and 0 of data memory
M1 are judged. Since bit 2 of data memory M1 is FALSE (0), the program branches to C.
11.5.2 FALSE (0) Bit Judgement
The FALSE (0) bit judgement instruction (SKF m, #n) is used to determine whether or not the bits specified by
n in the four bits of data memory m are FALSE (0). When all bits specified by n are FALSE (0), this instruction causes
the next instruction to be skipped.
Example MOV
M1,
M1,
A
#1011B
#0110B
SKT
BR
; <1>
; <2>
BR
B
SKT
BR
M1,
C
#1101B
BR
D
In this example, bits 2 and 1 of data memory M1 are judged in step number <1>. Because both bits
are FALSE (0), the program branches to B. In step number <2> bits 3, 2, and 1 of data memory M1
are judged. Since bit 3 of data memory M1 is TRUE (1), the program branches to C.
98
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.6 COMPARISON JUDGEMENT
As shown in Table 11-7, there are comparison judgement instructions for determining if one value is "equal to",
"not equal to", "greater than or equal to", or "less than" another.
The SKE instruction is used to determine if two values are equal. The SKNE instruction is used to determine two
values are not equal. The SKGE instruction is used to determine if one value is greater than or equal to another and
the SKLT instruction is used to determine if one value is less than another.
The SKE, SKNE, SKGE, and SKLT instructions perform comparisons between a value in data memory and
immediate data. In order to compare values in the general register and data memory, a subtraction instruction is
performed according to the values in the CMP and Z flags in the program status word (PSWORD). For more
information concerning comparison of the general register and data memory, refer to 11.3.
Comparison judgements are not affected by the BCD or CMP flags in the program status word (PSWORD) and
comparison judgements do not cause either the CY or Z flags in the program status word (PSWORD) to be set.
11.6.1 to 11.6.4 explain the "equal to", "not equal to", "greater than or equal to", and "less than" comparison
judgements.
Table 11-7. Comparison Judgement Instructions
Comparison
judgement
Equal to
SKE m, #n4
Not equal to
SKNE m, #n4
Greater than or equal to
SKGE m, #n4
Less than
SKLT m, #n4
99
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.6.1 "Equal to" Judgement
The "equal to" judgement instruction (SKE m, #n4) is used to determine if immediate data and the contents of
a location in data memory are equal.
This instruction causes the next instruction to be skipped when the immediate data and the contents of data
memory are equal.
Example MOV
M1,
M1,
A
#1010B
#1010B
SKE
BR
BR
;
; <1>
; <2>
B
SKE
BR
BR
M1,
C
#1000B
D
In this example, because the contents of data memory M1 and immediate data 1010B in step number
<1> are equal, the program branches to B. In step number <2>, because the contents of data memory
M1 and immediate data 1000B are not equal, the program branches to C.
11.6.2 "Not Equal to" Judgement
The "not equal to" judgement instruction (SKNE m, #n4) is used to determine if immediate data and the contents
of a location in data memory are not equal.
This instruction causes the next instruction to be skipped when the immediate data and the contents of data
memory are not equal.
Example MOV
M1,
#1010B
#1000B
SKNE M1,
; <1>
; <2>
BR
BR
;
A
B
SKNE M1,
#1010B
BR
BR
C
D
In this example, because the contents of data memory M1 and immediate data 1000B in step number
<1> are not equal, the program branches to B. In step number <2>, because the contents of data
memory M1 and immediate data 1010B are equal, the program branches to C.
100
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.6.3 "Greater Than or Equal to" Judgement
The "greater than or equal to" judgement instruction (SKGE m, #n4) is used to determine if the contents of a location
in data memory is a value greater than or equal to the value of the immediate data operand. If the value in data memory
is greater than or equal to that of the immediate data, this instruction causes the next instruction to be skipped.
Example MOV
M1,
#1000B
#0111B
SKGE M1,
; <1>
; <2>
; <3>
BR
BR
;
A
B
SKGE M1,
#1000B
#1001B
BR
BR
;
C
D
SKGE M1,
BR
BR
E
F
In this example, the program will first branch to B since the value in data memory is larger than that
of the immediate data. Next, it will branch to D since the value in data memory is equal to that of
the immediate data. Lastly it will branch to E since the value in data memory is less than that of the
immediate data.
11.6.4 "Less Than" Judgement
The "less than" judgement instruction (SKLT m, #n4) is used to determine if the contents of a location in data
memory is a value less than that of the immediate data operand. If the value in data memory is less than that of
the immediate data, this instruction causes the next instruction to be skipped.
Example MOV
M1,
M1,
A
#1000B
#1001B
SKLT
BR
BR
;
; <1>
; <2>
; <3>
B
SKLT
BR
BR
;
M1,
C
#1000B
#0111B
D
SKLT
BR
BR
M1,
E
F
In this example, the program will first branch to B since the value in data memory is less than that
of the immediate data. Next, it will branch to C since the value in data memory is equal to that of
the immediate data. Lastly it will branch to E since the value in data memory is greater than that of
the immediate data.
101
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.7 ROTATIONS
There are rotation instructions for rotation to the right and for rotation to the left.
The RORC instruction is used for rotation to the right.
The RORC instruction can only be used with the general register.
Rotation using the RORC instruction is not affected by the BCD or CMP flags in the program status word (PSWORD)
and does not affect the Z flag in the program status word (PSWORD).
Rotation to the left is performed by using the addition instruction ADDC.
11.7.1 and 11.7.2 explain rotation.
11.7.1 Rotation to the Right
The instruction used for rotation to the right (RORC r) rotates the contents of the general register in the direction
of its least significant bit.
When this instruction is executed, the contents of the CY flag becomes the most significant bit of the general
register (bit 3) and the least significant bit of the general register is placed in the CY flag.
Example 1. MOV PSW, #0100B ; Sets CY flag to 1.
MOV R1,
RORC R1
#1100B
When these instructions are executed, the following operation is performed.
b3
b2
b1
b0
CY flag
1
1
1
0
0
Basically, when rotation to the right is performed, the following operation is executed:
CY flag → b3, b3 → b2, b2 → b1, b1 → b0, b∞ → CY flag.
2. MOV PSW, #0000B ; Resets CY flag to 0.
MOV R1,
MOV R2,
MOV R3,
RORC R1
RORC R2
RORC R3
#1000B
#0100B
#0010B
The program code above rotates the 13 bits in CY, R1, R2 and R3 to the right.
102
CHAPTER 11 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
11.7.2 Rotation to the Left
Rotation to the left is performed by using the addition instruction, "ADDC r, m".
Example MOV
MOV
PSW
R1,
#0000B
#1000B
#0100B
#0010B
; Resets CY flag to 0.
MOV
R2,
MOV
R3,
ADDC R3, R3
ADDC R2, R2
ADDC R1, R1
The program code above rotates the 13 bits in CY, R1, R2 and R3 to the left.
103
[MEMO]
104
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.1 PORT 0A (P0A0, P0A1, P0A2, P0A3)
Port 0A is a 4-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into address 70H of BANK0 in data memory.
The output format is CMOS push-pull output.
Input or output can be specified in each bit. Input/output is specified by P0ABIO0 to P0ABIO3 (address 35H) in
the register file.
When P0ABIOn is 0 (n=0 to 3), each pin of port 0A is used as input port. If a read instruction is executed for the
port register, pin statuses are read.
When P0ABIOn is 1 (n=0 to 3), each pin of port 0A is used as output port and the contents written in the output
latch are output to pins. If a read instruction is executed when pins are output ports, the contents of the output latch,
rather than pin statuses, are fetched.
At reset, P0ABIOn is set to 0 and all P0A pins become input ports. The contents of the port output latch are 0.
Table 12-1. Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.70H)
BANK0 70H
P0ABIOn
RF: 35H
Pin Input/Output
Write
Possible
Read
0
1
Input
P0A pin status
Write to the P0A
latch
Output
P0A latch contents
105
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.2 PORT 0B (P0B0, P0B1, P0B2, P0B3)
Port 0B is a 4-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into address 71H of BANK0 in data memory.
The output format is CMOS push-pull output.
Input or output can be specified in 4-bit units. Input/output is specified by P0BGIO (bit 0 at address 24H) in the
register file.
When P0BGIO is 0, all pins of port 0B are used as input ports. If a read instruction is executed for the port register,
pin statuses are read.
When P0BGIO is 1, all pins of port 0B are used as output ports. The contents written in the output latch are output
to pins. If a read instruction is executed when pins are used as output ports, the contents of the output latch, rather
than pin statuses, are fetched.
At reset, P0BGIO is 0 and all P0B pins are input ports. The value of the port 0B output latch is 0.
Table 12-2. Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.71H)
BANK0 71H
P0BGIO
Pin Input/Output
RF: 24H, bit 0
Write
Read
Possible
Write to the P0B
latch
0
1
Input
P0B pin status
P0B latch contents
Output
106
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.3 PORT 0C (P0C0, P0C1, P0C2, P0C3) ... in the case of the µPD17120 and 17121
Port 0C is a 4-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into address 72H of BANK0 in data memory.
The output format is CMOS push-pull output.
Input or output can be specified bit-by-bit. Input/output can be specified by P0CBIO0 to P0CBIO3 (address 34H)
in the register file.
If P0CBIOn is 0 (n=0 to 3), the P0Cn pins are used as input port. If a data read instruction is executed for the
port register, the pin statuses are read. If P0CBIOn is 1 (n=0 to 3), the P0Cn pins are used as output port and the
contents written in the output latch are output to pins. If a read instruction is executed when pins are used as output
ports, the contents of the latch, rather than pin statuses, are fetched.
At reset, P0CBIO0 to P0CBIO3 are 0 and all P0C pins are input ports. The contents of the port output latch are
0.
Table 12-3. Writing/reading to/from Port Register (0.72H) (µPD17120, 17121)
(n=0 to 3)
BANK0 72H
P0CBIOn
RF: 34H
Pin Input/Output
Write
Possible
Read
0
1
Input
Status of P0C pin
Write to the P0C
latch
Output
Contents of P0C latch
107
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.4 PORT 0C (P0C0/Cin0, P0C1/Cin1, P0C2/Cin2, P0C3/Cin3)
... in the case of the µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133
Port 0C is a 4-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into address 72H of BANK0 in data memory.
The output format is CMOS push-pull output.
Input or output can be specified bit-by-bit. Input/output is specified with P0CBIO0 to P0CBIO3 (address 34H) in
the register file.
If P0CNIOn is 0 (n=0 to 3), the each pin of P0C is used as input port. If a data read instruction is executed for
the port register, the pin statuses are read.
If P0CNIOn is 1 (n=0 to 3), the each pin of P0C is used as output port and the value written in the output latch
are output to pins. If a data read instruction is executed when pins are used as output ports, the output latch value,
rather than pin statuses, is fetched.
Port 0C can also be used as an analog input to the comparator. P0C0IDI to P0C3IDI (address 23H) in the register
file are used to switch the port and analog input pin.
If P0CnIDI is 0 (n=0 to 3), the P0Cn/Cinn pin functions as a port. If P0CnIDI is 1 (n=0 to 3), the P0Cn/Cinn pin functions
as the analog input pin of the comparator.
Therefore, when using pins as analog inputs, 1 should be set to P0CnIDI at the initial setting of the program.
Switching of the analog input pins to be compared is executed by CMPCH0 and CMPCH1 (RF: address 1CH). To
use the pins as analog input pins of the comparator, set P0CBIOn=0 so that they are set as input ports (Refer to
13.2 COMPARATOR). At reset, P0CBIOn and P0CnIDI are set to 0 (n=0 to 3) and all of port 0C pins become input
ports. The contents of the port output latch become 0.
Table 12-4. Writing into and Reading from the Port Register (0.72H) and Pin Function Selection
(n=0 to 3)
BANK0 72H
P0CnIDI
RF: 23H
P0CBIOn
RF: 34H
Function
Write
Read
0
1
0
Input port
Pin state of P0C
0
Output port
Contents of P0C latch
Comparator analog
inputNote 1
Write in the P0C latch
Pin state of P0C
1
1
Analog inputs of
comparator and output
portNote 2
Contents of P0C
Notes 1. This setting is ordinally selected when the pins are used as analog inputs of the comparator.
2. These pins function as an output port. At this time, the analog input voltage is changed by the effect
of the output from the port. When using the pin as the analog input, be sure to set it to P0CBIOn=0.
108
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.5 PORT 0D (P0D0/SCK, P0D1/SO, P0D2/SI, P0D3/TMOUT)
Port 0D is a 4-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into address 73H of BANK0 in data memory.
The output format is N-ch open-drain output. The mask option can be used to specify that a pin contain a pull-up
Note
resistor bit-by-bit
.
Input or output can be specified bit-by bit. Input/output is specified with P0DBIO0 to P0DBIO3 (address 33H)
in the register file.
If P0DBIOn is 0 (n=0 to 3), the P0Dn pins are used as input port. Pin statuses are read if a data read instruction
is executed for the port register. If P0DBIOn is 1, the P0Dn pins are used as output port and the value written in
the output latch are output to pins. If a data read instruction is executed when pins are used as output ports, the
output latch value, rather than pin statuses, is fetched.
At reset, P0DBIOn is set to 0 and all P0D pins become input ports. The contents of the port output latch become
0. The output latch contents remain unchanged even if P0DBIOn changes from 1 to 0.
Port 0D can also be used for serial interface input/output or timer output. SIOEN (0AH bit 0) in the register file
is used to switch ports (P0D0 to P0D2) to serial interface input/output (SCK, SO, SI) and vice versa. TMOSEL (bit
0 at address 12H) in the register file is used to switch a port (P0D3) to timer output (TMOUT) and vice versa. If
TMOSEL=1 is selected, 1 is output at timer reset. This output is inverted every time a timer count value matches
the modulo register contents.
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option.
109
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
Table 12-5. Register File Contents and Pin Functions
(n=0 to 3)
Register File Value
Pin Function
TMOSEL
RF: 12H
Bit 0
SIOEN
RF: 0AH
Bit 0
P0DBIOn
RF: 33H
Bit n
P0D0/SCK
P0D1/SO
P0D2/SI
P0D3/TMOUT
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Input port
0
1
Output port
0
Input port
SCK
SCK
SO
SI
SI
Output port
Input port
0
1
Output port
1
TMOUT
SO
Table 12-6. Contents Read from the Port Register (0.73H)
Port Mode
Contents Read from the Port Register (0.73H)
Pin status
Input port
Output port
Output latch contents
Output latch contents
Pin status
An internal clock is selected as a serial clock.
An external clock is selected as a serial clock.
SCK
SI
Pin status
SO
Not defined
TMOUT
Output latch contents
Caution Using the serial interface causes the output latch for the P0D1/SO pin to be affected by the
contents of the SIOSFR (shift register). So, reset the output latch before using the pin as output
port.
110
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.6 PORT 0E (P0E0, P0E1/Vref) ... Vref; µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133 only
Port 0E is a 2-bit input/output port with an output latch. It is mapped into bits 0 and 1 of address 6FH in data
memory. The output format is N-ch open-drain output. The mask option can be used to specify that a pin contain
a pull-up resistor bit-by-bit.
P0E1/Vref pin is also used as external reference voltage input of the comparator (incorporated only in the µPD17132,
17133, 17P132, and 17P133), and its function is changed from port to external reference voltage input depending
on the value of the reference voltage selection resister. (CMPVREF0 to CMPVREF3) (Refer to 13.2 COMPARATOR.)
Input or output can be specified bit-by-bit. Input/output is specified with P0EBIO0 and P0EBIO1 (bits 0 and 1 at
address 32H) in the register file.
If P0EBIOn is 0 (n=0, 1), the each pin of P0E is used as input port. If a data read instruction is executed for the
port register, the pin statuses are read.
If P0EBIOn is 1 (n=0, 1), the each pin of P0E is used as output port and the value written in the output latch are
output pins.
If a data read instruction is executed regardless of the mode, the pin statuses, rather than output latch value, are
fetched.
At reset, P0EBIOn is set to 0 (n=0, 1) and each of port 0E pin become input port. The contents of the port output
latch become 0.
The write instruction to bits 2 and 3 at address 6FH becomes invalid. If the value is read, 0 is output.
Remark The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option.
Table 12-7. Writing into and Reading from the Port Registers (0.6FH.0, 0.6FH.1)
(n=0, 1)
BANK01 6FH
P0EBIOn
RF: 32H
Pin Input/
Output
Write
PossibleNote
Read
0
1
Input
Write to the output latch P0E pin status
of P0E
Output
Note Port register 6FH is a write only register. The data which is written during input mode (P0EBIOn=0) will
be ignored.
111
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.6.1 Cautions when Operating Port Registers
Among the input/output ports in the µPD17120 series, only port 0E is such that, even when in output mode, doing
a read causes the status of the pins to be read.
Consequently, when executing port register read macro instructions (SETn/CLRn, etc.) or bit manipulation
instructions such as AND/OR/XOR, etc., you may inadvertently change the status of the pins.
Be particularly careful when port 0E is being externally forced down to low level.
Figure 12-1 shows an example of the changes in the port register and microcontroller internal status when the
CLR1 P0E1 instruction (equivalent to the AND 6F, #1101B instruction) is executed.
For example, consider the case where both the P0E1 and P0E0 pins of port 0E are used for output, high level is
output from pins P0E1 and P0E0, and the P0E0 pin is being externally forced down to a low level; then the status
of each pin of port 0E is as shown in Figure 12-1 <1>. The (P0E3 and P0E2 pins do not exist in the µPD17120 subseries,
but are handled as if they exist in the program.)
If the CLR1 P0E1 instruction is executed to bring the P0E1 pin to low level, the status of each pin of port 0E changes
as shown in Figure 12-1 <2>. In this case, the P0E1 pin naturally changes to output low level, but the value of the
port register changes so that pin P0E0, which should output high level, also outputs low level. This result comes
about because the CLR1 P0E1 instruction is executed not on the port register, but on the state of the pins.
To avoid this phenomenon, use a MOV or other instruction to set the state of all the pins, not just the pins that
are to be changed. In this example, to set just the P0E1 pin to a low level, you can use the MOV 6FH, #1101 instruction,
and the problem will not occur.
For the same reason, when using port 0E for mixed input and output, be sure to put the pins that are being used
for input into input mode (P0EBI0n = 0).
Figure 12-1. Changes in Port Register Due to Execution of the CLR1 P0E1 Instruction
<1> Before executing instructions
P0E3
P0E2
P0E1
P0E0
1
Does not exist
Port register
1
H output
H
Microcomputer state
Pin state
–
–
–
–
H output
L (forced)
Execution of the CLR1 P0E1
instruction
[AND 6FH, #1101B]
<2> After executing instructions
P0E3
P0E2
P0E1
P0E0
Does not exist
Port register
0
L output
L
0
L output
L
Microcomputer state
Pin state
–
–
–
–
H: high level L: low level
112
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.7 PORT CONTROL REGISTER
12.7.1 Input/Output Switching by Group I/O
Ports which switch input/output in units of four bits are called group I/O. Port 0B is used as group I/O. The register
shown in the figure below is used for input/output switching.
Figure 12-2. Input/Output Switching by Group I/O
RF: 24H
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
P0BGIO
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
P0BGIO
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Function
Sets Port 0B to input mode.
Sets Port 0B to output mode.
0
1
113
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
12.7.2 Input/Output Switching by Bit I/O
Ports which switch input/output bit-by-bit are called bit I/O. Port 0A, port 0C, port 0D, and port 0E are used as
bit I/O. The register shown in the figure below is used for input/output switching.
Figure 12-3. Bit I/O Port Control Register (1/4)
RF: 35H
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
P0ABIO3
P0ABIO2
P0ABIO1
P0ABIO0
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
P0ABIO0
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Function
0
1
Sets P0A0 to input mode.
Sets P0A0 to output mode.
P0ABIO1
Function
0
1
Sets P0A1 to input mode.
Sets P0A1 to output mode.
P0ABIO2
Function
0
1
Sets P0A2 to input mode.
Sets P0A2 to output mode.
P0ABIO3
Function
0
1
Sets P0A3 to input mode.
Sets P0A3 to output mode.
114
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
Figure 12-3. Bit I/O Port Control Register (2/4)
RF: 34H
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
P0CBIO3
P0CBIO2
P0CBIO1
P0CBIO0
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
P0CBIO0
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Function
0
1
Sets P0C0 to input mode.
Sets P0C0 to output mode.
P0CBIO1
Function
Sets P0C1 to input mode.
Sets P0C1 to output mode.
0
1
P0CBIO2
Function
Sets P0C2 to input mode.
Sets P0C2 to output mode.
0
1
P0CBIO3
Function
Sets P0C3 to input mode.
Sets P0C3 to output mode.
0
1
115
CHAPTER 12 PORTS
Figure 12-3. Bit I/O Port Control Register (3/4)
RF: 33H
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
P0DBIO3
P0DBIO2
P0DBIO1
P0DBIO0
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
P0DBIO0
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Function
0
1
Sets P0D0 to input mode.
Sets P0D0 to output mode.
P0DBIO1
Function
Sets P0D1 to input mode.
Sets P0D1 to output mode.
0
1
P0DBIO2
Function
Sets P0D2 to input mode.
Sets P0D2 to output mode.
0
1
P0DBIO3
Function
Sets P0D3 to input mode.
Sets P0D3 to output mode.
0
1
Figure 12-3. Bit I/O Port Control Register (4/4)
RF: 32H
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
P0EBIO1
P0EBIO0
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
P0EBIO0
Function
0
1
Sets P0E0 to input mode.
Sets P0E0 to output mode.
Function
P0EBIO1
Sets P0E1 to input mode.
Sets P0E1 to output mode.
0
1
116
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1 8-BIT TIMER COUNTER (TM)
The µPD17120 subseries contains an 8-bit timer counter system. Control of the 8-bit timer counter is performed
through hardware manipulation using the PUT/GET instruction or through register manipulation on the register file
using the PEEK/POKE instruction.
13.1.1 8-Bit Timer Counter Configuration
Figure 13-1 shows the configuration of the 8-bit timer counter. The 8-bit timer counter consists of the comparator,
which compares the 8-bit count register, 8-bit modulo register, count register, and modulo register values; and the
separator, which selects the count pulse.
Caution The modulo register is for writing only. The count register is for reading only.
117
Figure 13-1. Configuration of the 8-bit Timer Counter
Data buffer
(DBF)
Internal bus
Timer carry
output control
mode register
(RF : 12H)
Bit I/O port
control register
(RF : 33H)
Timer mode register
(RF : 11H)
Interrupt control
register (RF : 0FH)
INT
TMEN TMRES TMCK1 TMCK0
TMOSEL
P0DBIO3
Timer
modulo register (8)
(TMM)
P0D3 output
latch
P0D3/
TMOUT
2
Match
TMOUT
Timer
comparator (8)
FF
Reset
fX/32
Latch
D
Q
fX/256
Timer count
register (8)
(TMC)
IRQTM set signal
Selector
fX /2048
CLK
R
INT
Clear
Reset
Internal
RESET
IRQTM clear signal
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1.2 8-bit Timer Counter Control Register
There are two types of 8-bit timer counter control registers; timer mode register and timer carry output control
mode register.
Figures 13-2 and 13-3 show the configuration of 8-bit timer counter control registers.
Figure 13-2. Timer Mode Register
RF: 11H
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TMEN TMRES TMCK1 TMCK0
R/W
Read/write
Read=R, write=W
TMCK1 TMCK0
1
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Source Clock Selection
f /256
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
x
f /32
x
f /2048
x
External clock from INT pin
Timer Reset
TMRES
0
1
No influence to timer
Reset count register (TMC) and IRQTM
Remark TMRES is automatically cleared (0) when set (1).
When reading it, 0 is always read.
TMEN
Timer Start Instruction
Stop timer counting.
0
1
Start timer counting.
TMEN can be used as the status flag which detects
the count state of the timer (0 : count stop, 1 : counting).
Remark
119
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1.3 Operation of 8-bit Timer Counters
(1) Count Register
Count register are 8-bit up counters whose initial values are 00H. They are incremented each time a count
pulse is entered.
The counter register is initialized in the following situations:
• when the microcontroller is reset (refer to CHAPTER 6 RESET);
• when the content of the 8-bit modulo register coincides with the count register value, thus causing the
comparator to generate the relevant signal; and
• when "1" is written in the TMRES of the register file.
(2) Modulo register
The modulo registers determine the count value of count register. They are initialized to FFH.
A value is set in a modulo register via the data buffer (DBF) using the PUT instruction.
(3) Comparator
The comparators output match signals when the value of the count register and modulo register match and
when the next count pulse is input. That is, if the value of the modulo register is initial value FFH, the
comparator outputs a match signal when 256 is counted.
The match signal from the comparator clears the contents of the count register to 0 and automatically sets
the interrupt request flag (IRQTM) to 1. At this time interrupt handling occurs if the EI instruction (interrupt
acceptance enable instruction) is executed and also the interrupt enable flag (IPTM) is set. When an interrupt
is accepted, the interrupt request flag (IRQTM) is set to 0 and program control transfers to the interrupt
handling routine.
13.1.4 Selecting Count Pulse
A count pulse is selected with TMCK0 or TMCK1.
One system clock fX can be selected from four types: a 2048-count pulse, 256-count pulse, 32-count pulse, and
an external count pulse input from the INT pin.
At reset, TMCK0 and TMCK1 are 0 and fX/256 is selected.
At power start-up or reset, timer is used to generate stabilization wait time. For this purpose, the initial values
are TMCK0=0 and TMCK1=0 and fX/256 is selected. Since the initial value is set to TMEN=1, the system starts at
address 0000H after 8 ms after reset at fX=8 MHz (32 ms at fX=2 MHz). (Refer to CHAPTER 16 RESET.)
120
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1.5 Setting a Count Value in Modulo Register and Calculation Method
Count value is set in the module register via the data buffer (DBF).
(1) Setting the count value in modulo register
A count value is set in the modulo register via the data buffer using the PUT instruction. The peripheral address
of the modulo register is 03H.
When a value is sent by the PUT instruction, data in the eight low-order bits (DBF1 and DBF0) of data buffer
is sent to the modulo register. Figure 13-3 shows an example of count value setting.
121
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-3. Setting the Count Value in a Modulo Register
Example of setting count value 64H in timer modulo register
CONTDATL DAT 4H
CONTDATH DAT 6H
; CONTDATL is assigned to 4H using the symbol definition instruction.
; CONTDATH is assigned to 6H using the symbol definition instruction.
MOV DBF0, #CONTDATL;
MOV DBF1, #CONTDATH;
PUT TMM, DBF
; The value is transferred with reserved word TMM.
Data Buffer
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
0
b2
b1
1
b0
0
b3
0
b2
b1
0
b0
1
1
0
Don't care
Don't care
8-bit data
PUT TMM, DBF
TMM (Peripheral Address 03H)
b7
0
b6 b5 b4 b3
b2
1
b1 b0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Caution The range of values that can be set in the module register is 01H to FFH. If 00H is set, normal
counting operation is not performed.
The modulo register is for writing only. If is not possible to read a value from the modulo register. Neither is
it possible, while the 8-bit timer counter is in operation, to stop the counting operation even by executing the PUT
TMM and DBF instructions.
122
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(2) Calculation method of count value
The time interval of the identity signal being emitted from the comparator is determined by the value that
is set in the modulo register. The formula for finding the value N of the modulo register from the time interval
T [sec] is shown below:
N+1
fCP
T=
= (N+1) × TCP
T
TCP
N=T × fCP –1 or N=
–1 (N=1 to 255)
fCP : Count pulse's frequency [Hz]
TCP : Count pulse's frequency [sec] (1/fCP = resolution)
(3) Calculation example and program example when calculating count value by interval time
• Example of assuming 7 ms as interval time for timer (System clock: fX=8 MHz)
Assuming 7 ms as interval time, it is impossible to set 7 ms interval time from the resolution of the timer.
Therefore, count value should be calculated by selecting the source clock the resolution of which is
maximum (fX/256, resolution: 32 µs) to set the nearest interval time.
Example t=7 ms, resolution: 32 µs
t
N =
=
–1
(Resolution)
7 × 10–3
32 × 10–5
– 1
= 217.75=218 (: DAH)
The value of modulo register the interval time of which becomes nearest to 7 ms is DAH, and the interval
time at that time becomes 7.008 ms.
123
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(Program example)
MOV
MOV
PUT
DBF0,
#0AH
; Stores DAH to DBF by using
DBF1,
TMM,
#0DH
DBF
; reserved words "DBF0" and "DBF1"
; Transfers the contents of DBF by using reserved word "TMM"
INITFLG TMEN, TMRES, NOT TMCK1, NOT TMCK0
; SetsTMENandTMRESbyusingbuilt-inmacroinstruction"INITFLG".
; Sets source clock of timer to "fX/256", and starts counting.
13.1.6 Margin of Error of Interval Time
It is possible for the interval time to generate a margin of error of up to –1.5 counts. Be careful if set value of
the modulo register is small.
(1) Error (up to –1 count) when the count register is cleared to 0 during counting
The count register of the 8-bit timer counter is cleared to 0 by setting (to 1) the TMRES flag. However, the
scaler for generating the count pulse from the system clock is not reset.
Therefore, if, during counting, the TMRES flag is set (to 1) to clear the count to 0, an error margin of one cycle
of the count pulse is generated in the timing of the first count. A count example when setting the modulo
register to 2 is shown below:
Figure 13-4. Error in Zero-Clearing the Count Register during Counting
Count clear (TMRES←0)
2 to 3 counts
Count pulse
Count register
1
2
0
1
2
Match signal output
In the example above, the identity signal is generated every three counts. However, only for the first time
after the count is cleared, the identity signal is generated for the minimal 2 counts.
The above error occurs not only when TMEN=1 ← 0 but when TMRES ← 1.
124
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(2) Error in Starting Counting from the Count Halt State
The count register of the 8-bit timer counter is cleared to zero by setting (to 1) the TMRES flag; however,
the scaler for generating the count pulse from the system clock is not reset. When the TMEN flag is set (to
1) to start the counting from the count halt status, the timing of the first count varies as follows depending
on whether the count pulse is started from the low level or from the high level.
When started from the high level: the next rising edge is the first count
When started from the low level: the count starting point is the first count
Therefore, only the first count after the counting is started generates an error of –0.5 to –1.5 counts during
the time until the identity signal is issued. An example of counting when 1 is set for the modulo register is
shown below.
Figure 13-5. Error in Starting Counting from the Count Halt State
(a) When the count pulse is stated from the high level (error: –0.5 to –1 count)
Counting start (TMEN = 1←0)
2 counts
1 to 1.5 count
Count pulse
Count register
0
1
0
1
Match signal output
Match signal output
125
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(b) When the count pulse is started from the low level (error: –1 to –1.5 counts)
Counting start (TMEN = 1←0)
0.5 to 1count
2 counts
Count pulse
Count register
0
1
0
1
0
Match signal output
Match signal output
In the example above, the identity signal is generated every 2 counts; however, only for the first count, the
identity signal is issued for 1.5 counts maximum and for 0.5 count minimum (error: –0.5 to –1.5 counts).
As the timer is in use even for generation of the oscillation stability wait time, the error margin above occurs
even to this oscillation stability wait time.
13.1.7 Reading Count Register Values
(1) Reading Counter values
The counter values of count register are read at the same time via DBF (data buffer) using the GET instruction.
The count register values of timer are assigned to peripheral address 02H.
Count register values of timer can be read into DBF by using the GET instruction. During execution of the
GET instruction, timer count register stops count operation and a count value is retained. When a count pulse
enters the timer in use during execution of the GET instruction, the count is retained.
After execution of the GET instruction, the count register increments by one and continues counting.
The scheme prevents miscounting as long as two or more count pulses are not input in one instruction cycle,
even when the GET instruction is executed during timer operation.
126
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-6. Reading 8-Bit Counter Count Values
The timer counter value is F0H.
GET DBF, TMC; Example of using reserved words DBF and TMC
Data Buffer
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
1
b2
b1
1
b0
1
b3
0
b2
b1
0
b0
1
0
0
Retained
Retained
GET DBF, TMC
8-bit data
TMC (Peripheral Address 02H)
b7
1
b6 b5 b4 b3
b2
0
b1 b0
1
1
1
0
0
0
Count value
(2) Program example
• Measuring pulse width input from INT pin (system clock: fX=8 MHz)
The following is an example of measuring generation interval of external interrupt from INT pin by using
timer. At this time the pulse width from INT pin should be within the count-up time of timer.
(Program example)
CNTTMH
CNTTML
MEM
0.30H
0.31H
00H
; Symbol definition of save area of count value
MEM
;
ORG
; Specifies vector address of interrupt
BR
MAIN
03H
;
;
;
ORG
BR
INTJOB
:
:
:
:
INITIAL:
INITFLG
IP, NOT IPTM, NOT IPSIO
; Prohibits interrupts other than external interrupt
127
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
INITFLG
NOT IEGMD1, IEGMD0
; Sets input from INT pin to falling edge
; Clears interrupt request signal from INT pin
TMEM, TMRES, NOT TMCK1, TMCK0
; Sets source clock of timer to "fX/32"
CLR1
IRQ
INITFLG
; Clears timer count register and IRQTM,
; and starts timer
EI
LOOP:
BR
BR
LOOP
TMRESTART
INTJOB:
; Vector interrupt becomes interrupt prohibit
; state automatically immediately after accepting
; interrupt
GET
DBF, TMC
MOV
RPH, #.DM. (CNTTMH SHR 7) AND 0EH
; Sets general register pointer by using
; symbol-defined "CNTTMH" and "CNTTML"
;
AND
OR
RPL, #0001B
RPL, # .DM. (CNTTMH SHR 3) AND 0EH
; At this time, BCD flag retains the previous state
LD
LD
EI
CNTTMH, DBF1
CNTTML, DBF0
; Stores count value to count save area
;
; Makes interrupt permit state when executing
; main processing program
RETI
; Returns to main processing program
128
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1.8 Timer Output
The P0D3/TMOUT pin functions as a timer match signal output pin when the TMOSEL flag is set to 1. The P0DBIO3
value has nothing to do with this setting.
Timer contains a match signal output flip-flop. It reverses the output each time the comparator outputs a match
signal. When the TMOSEL flag is set to 1, the contents of this flip-flop are output to the P0D3/TMOUT pin.
The P0D3/TMOUT pin is an N-ch open-drain output pin. The mask option enables this pin to contain a pull-up
resistor. If this pin does not contain a pull-up resistor, its initial status is high impedance.
An internal timer output flip-flop starts operating when TMEN is set to 1. To make the flip-flop start output
beginning at an initial value, set 1 in TMRES and reset the flip-flop.
Remark The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no mask option resistor.
Figure 13-7. Timer Output Control Mode Register
RF: 12H
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
TMOSEL
R/W
Read/write
Read=R, write=W
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
TMOSEL
Timer Output Control
0
1
P0D3 /TMOUT pin functions as port.
P0D3 /TMOUT pin functions as timer match
signal output.
129
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.1.9 Timer Resolution and Maximum Setting Time
Table 13-1 shows the timer resolution in each source clock and maximum setting time.
Table 13-1. Timer Resolution and Maximum Setting Time
Mode Register
Timer
Maximum Setting Time
System Clock
TMCK1
TMCK0
Resolution
32 µs
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
8.192 ms
1.024 ms
65.536 ms
4 µs
Note1
At 8 MHz
256 µs
Note 2
INT pin
INT pin
INT pin
INT pin
approx. 61.1 µs
approx. 7.64 µs
approx. 489 µs
approx. 15.6 ms
approx. 1.9 ms
approx. 125 ms
Note1
At 4.19 MHz
Note 2
128 µs
16 µs
32.768 ms
4.096 ms
At 2 MHz
1.024 ms
262.144 ms
Note 2
512 µs
64 µs
131.072 ms
16.384 ms
1.048576 s
At 500 kHz
4.096 ms
Note 2
Notes 1. The guaranteed frequency range of oscillation for the µPD17120/17132/17P132 is fCC=400 kHz to
2.4 MHz.
2. High/low level width of INT pin is 10 µs (MIN.) when VDD=4.5 to 5.5 V, and 50 µs (MIN.) when VDD=2.7
to 5.5 V. Refer to Data Sheet for detailed information.
130
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.2 COMPARATOR (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, AND 17P133 ONLY)
ThecomparatoroftheµPD17132,17133,17P132,and 17P133comparestheanaloginput(Cin0 toCin3)andreference
voltage (external: 1 type, internal: 15 types) and stores the comparison result to CMPRSLT (RF: 1EH, bit 0).
The comparator can also be used as a 4-bit A/D converter by software using 15 types of internal reference voltage.
13.2.1 Configuration of Comparator
Figure 13-8. Configuration of Comparator
Internal bus
RF : 1CH
RF : 1DH
RF : 1EH
0
0
CMPCH1 CMPCH1
CMPVREF0 CMPVREF1 CMPVREF2 CMPVREF3
0
0
CMPSTRT CMPRSLT
R
R × 16
Control
circuit
R
POE1/Vref
Comparator
POC0/Cin0
POC1/Cin1
POC2/Cin2
POC3/Cin3
–
+
100pF MAX.
Remark The sampling time of an analog input is as follows:
µPD17132, 17P132: 8/fCC (4 µs, at 2 MHz)
µPD17133, 17P133: 28/fX (3.5 µs, at 8 MHz)
131
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.2.2 Functions of Comparator
The comparator has a 4-channel analog input.
Concerning the pins used as analog input of the comparator, set 1 to P0CnIDI (n=0 to 3) at initial setting of the
program (refer to CHAPTER 12 PORTS).
One of analog inputs (Cin0 to Cin3) can be selected by the comparator input channel selection flag (CMPCH1,
CMPCH0 RF: 1CH, bits 1 and 0). One of the 16 types of reference voltages (external: 1, internal: 15) can be selected
by the comparator reference voltage selection flag (CMPVREF0 to CMPVREF3 RF: 1DH).
After setting the comparator start flag to 1 (CMPSTRT RF: 1EH, bit 1), comparison takes 2 instruction execution
cycles in the µPD17132 and 17P132, and 6 cycles in the µPD17133 and 17P133.
A comparison result is stored to the comparator comparison result flag (CMPRSLT RF: 1EH, bit 0).
Whether the comparator is operating or comparison is completed can be known by reading comparator start flag.
CMPSTRT=1...Comparator is operating (during analog voltage comparison)
CMPSTRT=0...Comparator is stopped (comparison is completed)
When comparing comparator analog voltage (CMPSTRT=1), manipulating comparator input channel selection flag
(CMPCH1 CMPCH0) or comparator reference voltage selection flag (CMPVREF0 to CMPVREF3) is ignored and the
data in these registers remain unchanged. Therefore, changing comparator operation modes are disabled.
CMPSTRT is cleared only when the voltage comparison operation of comparator is completed or when STOP
instruction is executed.
Caution When using the standby function, be sure to wait for the comparator operation to stop before
executing a standby instruction (HALT/STOP). If a STOP or HALT instruction is executed while
the comparator is in operation, the comparator operation is halted. If the internal reference
voltage has been selected at this time, current will keep flowing into the internal resistor ladder,
thus resulting in increased current consumption during standby mode.
Comparator input channel selection register, reference voltage selection register, and comparator operation
control register are shown in the Figures 13-9, 13-10, and 13-11, respectively.
132
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-9. Comparator Input Channel Selection Register
RF: 1CH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
CMPCH1 CMPCH0
R/W
Bit 0
Read/write
Read=R, write=W
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
CMPCH1 CMPCH0 Comparator Input Channel Selection
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Select Cin0
Select Cin1
Select Cin2
Select Cin3
Figure 13-10. Reference Voltage Selection Register
RF: 1DH
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CMPVREF3 CMPVREF2 CMPVREF1 CMPVREF0
R/W
Read/write
Read=R, write=W
1
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
CMPVREF3 CMPVREF2 CMPVREF1 CMPVREF0 Selected Reference Voltage
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Voltage applied to Vref pin
1/16 VDD
2/16 VDD (1/8 VDD)
3/16 VDD
4/16 VDD (1/4 VDD)
5/16 VDD
6/16 VDD (3/8 VDD)
7/16 VDD
8/16 VDD (1/2 VDD)
9/16 VDD
10/16 VDD (5/8 VDD)
11/16 VDD
12/16 VDD (3/4 VDD)
13/16 VDD
14/16 VDD (7/8 VDD)
15/16 VDD
When CMPSTRT =1, a write instruction to
this register is ignored (the data in the
register remains unchanged).
Caution
133
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-11. Comparator Operation Control Register
RF: 1EH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
CMPSTRT CMPRSLT
Read = R, write = W
Read/write
R/W
0
R
0
0
1
Initial value when reset
CMPRSLT
0
Comparator Operation Comparison Result
When the voltage from analog input (Cin0 to Cin3) is lower
than the external/internal reference voltage
When the voltage from analog input (Cin0 to Cin3) is
higher than the external/internal reference voltage
1
CMPSTRT
0
Comparator Operation Check (at Reading)
During comparator operation is stopped or comparator voltage
comparison operation is completed
1
During comparator is operating
Remark
CMPSTRT is cleared to 0 only when the comparator voltage com-
parison operation is completed or STOP instruction is executed.
CMPSTRT
Comparator Operation Start (at Writing)
Invalid
0
1
Start comparator operation
134
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.3 SERIAL INTERFACE (SIO)
The serial interfaces of the µPD17120 subseries consists of a shift register (SIOSFR, 8 bits), serial mode register,
and serial clock counter. It is used for serial data input/output.
13.3.1 Functions of the Serial Interface
This serial interface provides three signal lines: serial clock input pin (SCK), serial data output pin (SO), and serial
data input pin (SI). It allows 8 bits to be sent or received in synchronization with clocks. It can be connected to
peripheral input/output devices using any method with a mode compatible to that used by the µPD7500 or 75X series.
(1) Serial clock
Three types of internal clocks and one type of external clock can be selected. If an internal clock is selected
as a serial clock, it is automatically output to the P0D0/SCK pin.
Table 13-2. List of Serial Clock
SIOCK1
SIOCK0
Serial clock to be selected
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External clock from the SCK pin
fX/16
fX/128
fX/1024
(2) Transmission operation
By setting (to 1) SIOEN, each pin of port 0D (P0D0/SCK, P0D1/SO, P0D2/SI) functions as a pin for serial
interfacing. At this time, if SIOTS is set (to 1), the operation is started synchronously with the falling edge
of the serial clock. Also, setting SIOTS will result in automatically clearing IRQSIO.
The transfer is started from the most significant bit of the shift register synchronously with the falling edge
of the serial clock. And, the information on the SI pin is stored in the shift register from the most significant
bit, synchronously with the rising edge of the clock.
If the 8-bit data transfer is terminated, SIOTS is automatically cleared and IRQSIO is set.
Remark Serial transmission starts only from the most significant bit of the shift register contents. It is not
possible to transmit from the least significant bit. SI pin status is always stored in the shift register
in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock.
135
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-12. Block Diagram of the Serial Interface
P0D2/SI
LSB
MSB
Shift register (SIOSFR)
SIOTS
SIOHIZ
SIOCK1 SIOCK0
IRQSIO
clear signal
P0D1/SO
Output Note
latch
One
shot
IRQSIO
set signal
P0D0/SCK
Serial clock counter
Carry
Clear
Clock
S
Q
R
Output
latch
Selector
SIOEN
P0DBIO0
P0DBIO1
Note The output latch of the shift register is common with the output latch of P0D1. Therefore, if an output
instruction is executed for P0D1, the output latch state of the shift register is also changed.
136
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.3.2 3-wire Serial Interface Operation Modes
Two modes can be used for the serial interface. If the serial interface function is selected, the P0D2/SI pin always
takes in data in synchronization with the serial clock.
• 8-bit send/receive mode (concurrent send/receive)
• 8-bit receive mode (SO pin: high-impedance state)
Table 13-3. Serial Interface's Operation Mode
SIOEN
SIOHIZ
P0D2/SI pin
P0D1/SO pin
SO
Serial Interface Operation Mode
8-bit send/receive mode
8-bit receive mode
1
0
1
×
SI
SI
1
P0D1 (input)
0
P0D2 (input/output) P0D1 (input/output)
General-purpose port mode
×: Don't care
(1) 8-bit transmission and reception mode (simultaneous transmission and reception)
Serial data input/output is controlled by a serial clock. The MSB of the shift register is output from the SO
line with a falling edge of the serial clock (SCK). The contents of the shift register is shifted one bit and at
the same time, data on the SI line is loaded into the LSB of the shift register.
The serial clock counter counts serial clock pulses. Every time it counts eight clocks, the interrupt request
flag is set (IRQSIO ← 1).
Figure 13-13. Timing of 8-Bit Transmission and Reception Mode
(Simultaneous Transmission Reception)
SCK pin
SI pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
SO pin
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
IRQSIO
Transmission starts in synchronization with the SCK pin falling edge.
Transmission
completion
An instruction which writes 1 into SIOTS is executed.
(Transmission start indication)
Remark DIn
:
Serial input data
DOn : Serial output data
137
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(2) 8-bit receive mode (SO pin: high impedance state)
When SIOHIZ=1, the P0D1/SO pin is placed in the high-impedance state. At this time, if "1" is written into
SIOTS to start supply of the serial clock, the serial interface operates only the receiving function.
Because the P0D1/SO pin is placed in the high-impedance state, it can be used as an input port (P0D1).
Figure 13-14. Timing of the 8-Bit Reception Mode
SCK pin
SI pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
High impedance
SO pin
IRQSIO
Transmission starts in synchronization with the SCK pin falling edge.
Transmission
completion
An instruction which writes 1 into SIOTS is executed.
(Transmission start indication)
Remark DIn: Serial input data
(3) Operation stop mode
If the value in SIOTS (RF: address 1AH, bit 3) is 0, the serial interface enters operation stop mode. In this
mode, no serial transfer occurs.
In this mode, the shift register does not perform shifting and can be used as an ordinary 8-bit register.
138
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-15. Serial Interface Control Register (1/2)
RF: 1AH
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SIOTS
SIOHIZ SIOCK1 SIOCK0
R/W
Read = R, write = W
SIOCK1 SIOCK0
Read/write
0
0
0
0
Initial value when reset
Serial Clock Selection
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External clock (SCK pin)
fX/16
fX/128
fX/1024
SIOHIZ
Function Selection of the P0D1/SO pin
Serial data output (SO pin)
Input port (P0D1 pin)
0
1
Confirmation of Shift Register Operation Status
(at Reading)
SIOTS
The shift register is in the stop status.
The shift register is operating.
0
1
SIOTS
0
Start and Stop of Serial Transmission (at Writing)
Forced termination of the shift register.
Disables intermediate restart.
Start of shift register operation
• At internal clock selection
Starts operating internal devided signal of a
system clock (fX) as a serial clock
• At external clock selection
1
Starts operation in synchronization with an SCK
pin falling edge.
Remark SIOTS is automatically cleared to 0 when serial
transmission is completed.
139
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
Figure 13-15. Serial Interface Control Register (2/2)
RF: 0AH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
SIOEN
Read = R, write = W
Read/write
R/W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
0
Serial Interface Enable
SIOEN
0
The pins of port 0D (P0D0/SCK, P0D1/SO, P0D2/SI)
function as ports.
The pins of port 0D (P0D0/SCK, P0D1/SO, P0D2/SI)
function as the serial interface.
1
Remark Refer to CHAPTER 12 PORTS
140
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.3.3 Setting Values in the Shift Register
Values are set in the shift register via the data buffer (DBF) using the PUT instruction.
The peripheral address of the shift register is 01H. When sending a value to the shift register using the PUT
instruction, only the low-order eight bits (DBF1, DBF0) of DBF are valid. The DBF3 and DBF2 values do not affect
the shift register.
Figure 13-16. Setting a Value in the Shift Register
Example of setting value 64H in the shift register
SIODATL DAT
SIODATH DAT
MOV
4H
; SIODATL is assigned to 4H using symbol definition.
6H
; SIODATH is assigned to 6H using symbol definition.
DBF0, #SIODATL
DBF1, #SIODATH
SIOSFR, DBF
;
MOV
;
PUT
; Value is transmitted using reserved word SIOSFR.
Data Buffer
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
0
b2
b1
1
b0
0
b3
0
b2
b1
0
b0
1
1
0
Don't care
Don't care
8-bit data
PUT SIOSFR,DBF
SIOSFR (Peripheral Address 01H)
b7
0
b6 b5 b4 b3
b2
1
b1 b0
1
1
0
0
0
0
141
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.3.4 Reading Values from the Shift Register
A value is read from the shift register via the data buffer (DBF) using the GET instruction. The shift register has
peripheral address 01H and only the eight low-order bits (DBF1, DBF0) are valid. Executing the GET instruction does
not affect the eight high-order bits of DBF.
Figure 13-17. Reading a Value from the Shift Register
GET DBF, SIOSFR; Example of using reserved words DBF and SIOSFR
Data Buffer
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
0
b2
b1
1
b0
0
b3
0
b2
b1
0
b0
1
1
0
Retained
Retained
GET DBF, SIOSFR
8-bit data
SIOSFR (Peripheral Address 01H)
b7
0
b6 b5 b4 b3
b2
1
b1 b0
1
1
0
0
0
0
142
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
13.3.5 Program Example of Serial Interface
(1) Program example of data transmission/reception by 8-bit transmission/reception mode (synchronous
transmission/reception)
This program executes data transmission/reception synchronizing with fX/128. Judgment of finishing serial
data transmission/reception is executed by checking interrupt request flag.
Example
MAIN:
CALL
BR
SIOJOB
MAIN
SIOJOB:
DI
; Prohibits interrupt in SIOJOB
; Clears interrupt request flag of SIO
; Enables SIO
CLR1
SET1
MOV
MOV
PUT
IRQSIO
SIOEN
DBF0, #SIODATL
DBF1, #SIODATH
SIOSFR, DBF
; Sets transmitted data
INITFLG
SIOTS, NOT SIOHIZ, SIOCK1, NOT SIOCK0
; Sets serial clock to "fX/128", starts shift
; register operation, and outputs serial data
LOOP:
SKT1
BR
IRQSIO
; Transmission/reception finish judgment
; Waits finishing transmission/reception
; Reads reception data
LOOP
GET
EI
DBF, SIOSFR
; Permits interrupt and returns to main processing
;
RET
143
CHAPTER 13 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE
(2) Program example of data reception by 8-bit reception mode
This program executes data reception synchronizing with external clock, and reads reception data by using
interrupt processing.
Example
SIODATH MEM
0.50H
0.51H
0H
SIODATL MEM
ORG
BR
SIO_INIT
01H
ORG
BR
SIOJOB
SIO_INIT:
MOV
SIODATH, #0H
SIODATL, #0H
IRQSIO
MOV
CLR1
; Clears interrupt request flag of SIO
; Enables SIO
SET1
SIOEN
INITFLG SIOTS, SIOHIZ, NOT SIOCK1, NOT SIOCK0
; Sets serial clock to external clock, starts receiving
; serial data, and sets P0D1/SO pins to input port
; (output high impedance)
EI
; Permits all interrupts
; Main processing
MAIN:
CALL
CALL
××JOB
××JOB
BR
MAIN
SIOJOB:
GET
MOV
MOV
LD
DBF, SIOSFR
RPH, #0000B
RPL, #1010B
; Reads reception data
; Sets general register to low address 5H of BANK0
; BCD ← 0
SIODATH, DBF1
SIODATL, DBF0
; Stores reception data on RAM
;
LD
EI
RETI
144
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
The µPD17120 subseries has two internal interrupt functions and one external interrupt function. It can be used
in various applications.
The interrupt control circuit of this product has the features listed below. This circuit enables very high-speed
interrupt handling.
(a) Used to determine whether an interrupt can be accepted with the interrupt mask enable flag (INTE) and
interrupt enable flag (IP×××).
(b) The interrupt request flag (IRQ×××) can be tested or cleared. (Interrupt generation can be checked by
software).
(c) Standby mode (STOP, HALT) can be released by an interrupt request. (Release source can be selected by
the interrupt enable flag.)
Cautions 1. In interrupt handling, the BCD, CMP, CY, Z, and IXE flags are saved in the stack automatically
by the hardware for one level of multiple interrupts. The DBF and WR are not saved by the
hardware when peripheral hardware such as the timers or serial interface is accessed in
interrupt handling. It is recommended that the DBF and WR be saved in RAM by the software
at the beginning of interrupt handling. Saved data can be loaded back into the DBF and WR
immediately before the end of interrupt handling.
2. Because the interrupt stack is only one level, multi-interrupt by hardware cannot be executed.
If the interrupt over one level is accepted, the first data is lost.
145
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.1 INTERRUPT SOURCES AND VECTOR ADDRESS
For every interrupt in the µPD17120 subseries, when the interrupt is accepted, a branch occurs to the vector
address associated with the interrupt source. This method is called the vectored interrupt method. Table 14-1 lists
the interrupt sources and vector addresses.
If two or more interrupt requests occur or the retained interrupt requests are enabled at the same time, they are
handled according to priorities shown in Table 14-1.
Table 14-1. Interrupt Source Types
Vector
Address
Internal/
External
Interrupt Source
Priority
1
IRQ Flag IP Flag
IEG Flag
Remarks
INT pin (RF: 0FH, bit 0)
0003H IRQ
IP
IEGMD0, 1 External Rising edge or falling
Edge can be selected.
RF: 3FH, RF: 2FH, RF: 1FH
bit 0
bit 0
Timer
SIO
2
3
0002H IRQTM
IPTM
Internal
Internal
RF: 3EH, RF: 2FH,
bit 0
–
–
bit 1
0001H IRQSIO
IPSIO
RF: 3DH, RF: 2FH,
bit 0 bit 2
146
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.2 HARDWARE COMPONENTS OF THE INTERRUPT CONTROL CIRCUIT
The flags of the interrupt control circuit are explained below.
14.2.1 Interrupt Request Flag (IRQ×××) and the Interrupt Enable Flag (IP×××)
The interrupt request flag (IRQ×××) is set to 1 when an interrupt request occurs. When interrupt handling is
executed, the flag is automatically cleared to 0.
An interrupt enable flag (IP×××) is provided for each interrupt request flag. If the flag is 1, an interrupt is enabled.
If it is 0, the interrupt is disabled.
14.2.2 EI/DI Instruction
The EI/DI instruction is used to determine whether an accepted interrupt is to be executed.
If the EI instruction is executed, INTE for enabling interrupt reception is set. Since the INTE flag is not registered
in the register file, flag status cannot be checked by instructions.
The DI instruction clears the INTE flag to 0 and disables all interrupts.
At reset the INTE flag is cleared to 0 and all interrupts are disabled.
Table 14-2. Interrupt Request Flag and Interrupt Enable Flag
Interrupt
Request Flag
Interrupt
Enagle Flag
Signal for Setting the Interrupt Request Flag
IRQ
Set by edge detection of an INT pin input signal.
A detection edge is selected by IEGMD0 or
IEGMD1.
IP
IRQTM
IRQSIO
Set by a match signal from timer.
IPTM
Set by a serial data transmission end signal from IPSIO
the serial interface.
147
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-1. Interrupt Control Register (1/4)
RF: 0FH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
INT
Read/write
R
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
Note
INT
State of INT Pin
INT pin noise elimination circuit sets logical status
to 0 during PEEK instruction execution.
0
1
INT pin noise elimination circuit sets logical status
to 1 during PEEK instruction execution.
Note Since the INT flags are not latched, they change all the
time in response to the logical state of the pin, However,
once the IRQ flag is set, it stays set until an interrupt is
accepted. The POKE instruction to address 0FH is invalid.
RF: 1FH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
Bit 0
IEGMD1 IEGMD0
R/W
Read/write
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
0
Selection of the Interrupt Detection Edge
IEGMD1 IEGMD0
of the INT Pin
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Interrupt at the rising edge
Interrupt at the falling edge
Interrupt at both edges
148
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-1. Interrupt Control Register (2/4)
RF: 3FH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
IRQ
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
0
IRQ
0
INT Pin Interrupt Request (at Reading)
No interrupt request has been issued from the INT
pin or an INT pin interrupt is being handled.
An interrupt request from the INT pin occurs or an
INT pin interrupt is being held.
1
IRQ
0
INT Pin Interrupt Request (at Writing)
An interrupt request from the INT pin is forcibly
released.
An interrupt request from the INT pin is forced to
occur.
1
RF: 3FH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
IRQTM
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
1
IRQTM
0
TM Interrupt Request (at Reading)
No interrupt request has been issued from
timer or a timer interrupt is being handled.
The contents of the timer count register matches
that of the timer modulo register and an interrupt
request occurs. Or a timer interrupt request is
being held.
1
IRQTM
TM Interrupt Request (at Writing)
0
1
An interrupt request from timer is forcibly released.
An interrupt request from timer is forced to occur.
Remark If TMRES is set to 1, IRQTM is cleared to 0.
IRQTM is cleared to 0 immediately after STOP
instruction is executed.
149
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-1. Interrupt Control Register (3/4)
RF: 3DH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
IRQSIO
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
0
IRQSIO
0
SIO Interrupt Request (at Reding)
No interrupt request has been issued from the
serial interface or a serial interface interrupt is
being handled.
Serial interrupt transmission is completed and an
interrupt request occurs. Or, a serial interface
intrrupt request is being held.
1
IRQSIO
0
SIO Interrupt Request (at Writing)
An interrupt request from the serial interface is
forcibly released.
An interrupt request from the serial interface is
forced to occur.
1
150
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-1. Interrupt Control Register (4/4)
RF: 2FH
Bit 3
0
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IP
IPSIO
IPTM
Read/write
R/W
Read=R, write=W
Initial value when reset
0
0
0
0
IP
INT Pin Interrupt Enable
Disables an interrupt from the INT pin.
Holds interrupt handling when the IRQ flag is set
to 1.
0
1
Enables an interrupt from the INT pin.
Executes the EI instruction. If the IRQ flag is set
to 1, executes interrupt handling.
IPTM
0
TM Interrupt Enable
Disables an interrupt from timer.
Holds an interrupt if the IRQTM flag is set to 1.
Enables an interrupt from timer.
Executed the EI instruction. If the IRQTM flag is
set to 1, executes interrupt handling.
1
IPSIO
0
SIO Interrupt Enable
Disables an interrupt from serial interface.
Holds an interrupt if the IRQSIO flag is set to 1.
Enables an interrupt from serial interface.
Executed the EI instruction. If the IRQSIO flag is
set to 1, executes interrupt handling.
1
151
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.3 INTERRUPT SEQUENCE
14.3.1 Acceptance of Interrupts
The moment an interrupt is accepted, the instruction cycle of the instruction which has been executed is
terminated, and the interrupt operation is started thus altering the flow of the program to the vector address.
However, if the interrupt occurs during execution of the MOVT instruction, the EI instruction or an instruction which
has satisfied the skip condition, the processing of this interrupt is started after two instruction cycles are completed.
If interrupt operation is started, one level of the address stack register is consumed to store the return address
of the program, and also a level of the interrupt stack register is used to save the PSWORD in the system register.
If multiple interrupts are enabled and occure simultaneously, the interrupts are processed in order of higher priority.
In this case, an interrupt with a lower priority is put on hold until the interrupts with higher priority are processed.
For details of the priority levels, refer to Table 14-1. Types of Interrupt Factors.
Caution The PSWORD is automatically reset to 00000B after being saved in the interrupt stack register.
152
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-2. Interrupt Handling Procedure
Interrupt request generation
Set IRQ×××
NO
NO
IP××× set?
Hold interrupt until IP××× is set
YES
EI instruction executed?
(INTE=1?)
Hold interrupt until EI instruction
is executed
YES
Clear INTE flat and IRQ××× associated with
accepted interrupt to 0
Decrement stack pointer by 1 (SP-1)
Save contents of program counter in stack
pointed to by stack pointer
Load vector address into program counter
Save PSWORD content in interrupt stack
register
153
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.3.2 Return from the Interrupt Routine
Execute the RETI instruction to return from the interrupt handling routine. During the RETI instruction cycle,
processing in the figure below occurs.
Figure 14-3. Return from Interrupt Handling
Execute RETI instruction
Load contents of stack pointed to by stack
pointer into program counter
Load contents of interrupt-dedicated stack
register into PSWORD
Increment stack pointer value by one
Cautions1. The INTE flag is not set for the RETI instruction.
Interrupt handling is completed. To handle a pending interrupt successively, execute the EI
instruction immediately before the RETI instruction and set the INTE flag to 1.
2. To execute the RETI instruction following the EI instruction, no interrupt is accepted between
EI instruction execution and RETI instruction execution. This is because the EI instruction
sets the INTE flag to 1 after the execution of the subsequent instruction is completed.
Example
EI instruction execution
Single interrupt
Timer 0 interrupt handling
Timer 0 interrupt generation
Timer 1 interrupt generation
(held)
EI
RETI
Timer 1 interrupt handling
RETI
Timer 0 interrupt generation
(held)
154
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.3.3 Interrupt Acceptance Timing
Figure 14-4 shows the interrupt acceptance timing chart. The µPD17120 subseries executes an instruction with
16 clocks, which is one instruction cycle. One instruction cycle is subdivided into M0-M3 in terms of 4 clocks as
a unit.
The timing of the program recognizing the interrupt occurrence coincides with the edge preceding the M2.
Figure 14-4. Interrupt Acceptance Timing Chart (when INTE=1 and IP×××=1) (1/3)
<1> When an interrupt has occurred before M2 of an instruction other than MOVT or EI
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
An instruction other than MOVT or EI
INT cycle
Vector address instruction
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
<2> When the skip condition for the skip instruction is materialized in <1>
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
Skip instruction
Interrupt occurrence recognized
Handled as NOP
INT cycle
IRQ×××
<3> When an interrupt has occurred after M2 of an instruction other than MOVT or EI
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
An instruction other than MOVT or EI An instruction other than MOVT or EI
INT cycle
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
155
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-4. Interrupt Acceptance Timing Chart (when INTE=1, IP×××=1) (2/3)
<4> When an interrupt has occurred before M2 of a MOVT instruction
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
MOVT instruction
Interrupt occurrence recognized
INT cycle
IRQ×××
<5> When an interrupt has occurred before M2' of a MOVT instruction
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
MOVT instruction
INT cycle
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
<6> When an interrupt has occurred before M2 of an EI instruction
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
An instruction other than MOVT or EI
EI instruction
INT cycle
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
<7> When an interrupt has occurred after M2 of an EI instruction
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
An instruction other than MOVT or EI
EI instruction
INT cycle
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
156
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
Figure 14-4. Interrupt Acceptance Timing Chart (INTE=1 and IP×××=1) (3/3)
<8> When an interrupt has occurred during skipping (NOP handling) by a skip instruction
Machine cycle
Instruction
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
M2
M3
M0
M1
Vector address
instruction
Skip instruction
Handled as NOP
INT cycle
Interrupt occurrence recognized
IRQ×××
Remarks 1. The INT cycle is for preparing interrupts. During this cycle, PC and PSWORD saving and IRQ clearing
are performed.
2. For execution of the MOVT instruction, two instruction cycles are exceptionally required.
3. The EI instruction is considered to prevent multiple interrupts from occurring when returning from
the interrupt operation.
157
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
14.4 PROGRAM EXAMPLE OF INTERRUPT
• Program example of contermeasure for noise reduction of external interrupt (INT pin)
This example assumes the case of assigning INT pin for key input, etc.
When taking into the microcontroller data in kind of switch such as key input processing, it takes some time
for the level of input voltage to be stabilized after pushing the key or switch. Accordingly, the countermeasures
for removing the noise generated by key, etc. should be executed by software.
In the following program, after generating external interrupt, the signal from INT pin becomes effective after
confirming that there is not change in the level of INT pin two times in every 100 µs.
Example
WAITCNT MEM
0.00H
0.01H.3
0.01H.0
0H
; Counter of wait processing
KEYON
FLG
FLG
ORG
BR
; If key ON is determined (even just once), KEYON=1
; A flag describing key-checking for the second time.
SECOND
JOB_INIT
3H
ORG
BR
INT_JOB
.
.
.
.
.
JOB_INIT:
MOV
WAITCNT, #0
; Clears RAM and the flag on RAM
CLR2
KEYON, SECOND ;
INITFLG
NOT IEGMD1, IEGMD0
; Rising edge is effective for the interrupt from INT pin
CLR1
SET1
EI
IRQ
IP
.
.
.
.
.
MAIN:
CALL
CALL
××JOB
××JOB
; arbitrary processing
; arbitrary processing
.
.
.
.
.
BR
MAIN
158
CHAPTER 14 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
INT_JOB:
NOP
NOP
; Loop which executes waiting for 100 µs at 8 MHz
; 2 µs (1 instruction) × 5 instructions × 10 times
; (count value at WAIT)
ADD
SKE
BR
WAITCNT, #01
WAITCNT, #0AH
INT_JOB
;
;
;
SKF1
BR
INT
; Check the level of INT pin
KEY_OFF
; If INT pin is high level, interrupt is invalid, and returns
; to main processing
SKF1
BR
SECOND
; First wait?
WAIT_END
; If it is the first time, wait again after setting SECOND.
; In the case of the second time, finish wait processing
;
SET1
MOV
BR
SECOND
WAITCNT, #0
INT_JOB
WAIT_END:
KEY_OFF:
SET1
BR
KEYON
; Judges that there is key input
INT_JOB_END
CLR1
SECOND
; SECOND←0
INT_JOB_END:
MOV
WAITCNT, #0
EI
RETI
159
[MEMO]
160
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
15.1 OUTLINE OF STANDBY FUNCTION
The µPD17120 subseries reduces current consumption by using a standby function. In standby mode, the series
uses STOP mode or HALT mode depending on the application.
STOP mode is a mode that stops the system clock. In this mode, the CPU's current consumption is mostly limited
to the leakage current. Therefore, this is useful for retaining the contents of the data memory without operating
the CPU.
HALT mode is a mode that halts CPU operation because the clock supplying the CPU is stopped even when the
system clock's oscillation continues. Although, compared with STOP mode, this mode does not reduce the current
consumption, operation can start immediately after HALT is canceled because the system clock is oscillating. Also,
in either the STOP mode or HALT mode, the status of items such as the data memory, registers, the output port's
output latch, etc. immediately before being set to standby mode are retained (STOP 0000B excluded).
Therefore, before placing the system in standby mode, please set the port's status in a way that the current
consumption of the whole system is reduced.
161
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
Table 15-1. States during Standby Mode
STOP mode
HALT Mode
HALT instruction
Oscillation continued
Instruction to set
STOP instruction
Clock Oscillation Circuit
Operation CPU
Oscillation stopped
• Operation stopped
Statuses
RAM
Port
TM
• Immediately-preceding status retained
• Immediately-preceding status retainedNote 1
• Operation stopped
• Operable
(The count value is reset to "0".)
(The count up is also disabled.)
SIO
• Operable only when an external
clock has been selected for the
shift clockNote 1
• Operable
ComparatorNote 2 • Operation stoppedNote 1
• Operation stopped (The result after
resumption of the operation is
"undefined".)
INT
• Operable
Notes 1. At the point where STOP 0000B has been executed, the pin's status is placed in input port mode even
when the pin is used with its dual function.
2. Limited to µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133.
Cautions 1. Be sure to place a NOP instruction immediately before the STOP instruction or the HALT
instruction.
2. Both the interrupt request flag and the interrupt enable flag are set and are not placed in
standby mode if their interruption is specified in the condition for canceling the standby
mode.
162
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
15.2 HALT MODE
15.2.1 HALT Mode Setting
The system is placed in HALT mode by executing the HALT instruction. The HALT instruction's operands b3b2b1b0
are the conditions for canceling HALT mode.
Table 15-2. HALT Mode Cancellation Condition
Format: HALT b3b2b1b0B
Bit
Condition for Canceling HALT ModeNote 1
b3
b2
At 1, cancellation by IRQ××× is enabled.Notes 2, 4
"Fixed to 0"
b1
b0
At 1, forced cancellation by IRQTM is enabled.Note 3, 4
"Fixed to 0"
Notes 1. At HALT 0000B, only the resets (RESET input; power-ON/power-DOWN reset) are valid.
2. It is required that IP×××=1.
3. Regardless of the PITM's state, HALT mode is canceled.
4. Even if the HALT instruction is executed when IRQ×××=1, the HALT instruction is ignored (handled
as the NOP instruction) thus failing to place the system in HALT mode.
15.2.2 Start Address after HALT Mode is Canceled
The start address varies depending on the cancellation condition and the interrupt enable condition.
Table 15-3. Start Address After HALT Mode Cancellation
Cancellation Condition Start Address After Cancellation
ResetNote 1
Address 0
IRQ××Note 2
If DI, the start address is the one following the HALT instruction
If EI, the start address is the interrupt vector.
(If more than one IRQ××× have been set, the start address is the interrupt
vector with a higher priority.)
Notes 1. Valid resets include the RESET input and power-ON/power-DOWN resets.
2. Except for forced cancellation by IRQTM, it is required that IP×××=1.
163
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
Figure 15-1. Cancellation of HALT Mode
(a) HALT cancellation by RESET input
Execution of the
HALT instruction
TM count up
RESET
Operation
mode
HALT mode
System reset srtate
WAIT a
Operation mode
(Start of address 0)
WAIT a: This refers to the wait time until TM counts the divide-by-256 clock up to 256.
256 × 256/fX (when approximately 32 ms and fX=2MHz)
(b) HALT cancellation by IRQ××× (if DI)
Execution of the
HALT instruction
IRQ×××
Operation
mode
HALT mode
Operation mode
(c) HALT cancellation by IRQ××× (if EI)
Execution of the
HALT instruction
Interrupt operation
acceptance
IRQ×××
Operation
mode
HALT mode
Operation mode
164
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
15.2.3 HALT Setting Condition
(1) Forced cancellation by IRQTM
• The timer is in the operable state (TMEN=1)
• The timer's interrupt request flag is cleared (IRQTM=0).
(2) Cancellation by the interrupt request flag (IRQ×××)
• Setting in a way that places beforehand the peripheral hardware used for HALT cancellation in an operable
state.
Timer
Operable state (TMEN=1)
Serial Interface
INT Pin
Serial interface circuit placed in operable state (SIOTS=1, SIOEN=1)
Setting the edge selection
• The interrupt request flag (IRQ×××) of the peripheral hardware used for HALT cancellation is cleared (to
0).
• The interrupt enable flag (IP×××) of the peripheral hardware used for HALT cancellation is set (to 1).
Caution Be sure to code a NOP instruction immediately before the HALT instruction. The time of one
instruction is generated between the IRQ××× operation instruction and the HALT instruction by
coding the NOP instruction immediately before the HALT instruction. Therefore, in the case of
the CLR1 IRQ××× instruction, for example, the clearance of the IRQ××× is correctly reflected in
the HALT instruction (Example 1). If a NOP instruction is not coded immediately before the HALT
instruction, the CLR1 IRQ××× instruction is not reflected in the HALT instruction thus failing to
place the system in HALT mode (Example 2).
165
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
Example 1. A correct program example
.
.
.
.
.
.
(Setting of IRQ×××)
.
.
.
.
.
.
CLR1 IRQ×××
NOP
; Codes a NOP instruction immediately before the HALT instruction
; (Clearance of IRQ××× is reflected correctly to the HALT instruction.
HALT 1000B ; Executes the HALT instruction correctly (placing the system in HALT mode).
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. An incorrect program example
.
.
.
.
.
.
(Setting of IRQ×××)
.
.
.
.
.
.
CLR1 IRQ××× ; Clearance of IRQ××× is not reflected as to the HALT instruction.
; (It is the instruction following the HALT instruction that is reflected.)
HALT 1000B ; The HALT instruction is ignored (not placing the system in HALT mode.)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
166
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
15.3 STOP MODE
15.3.1 STOP Mode Setting
Executing the STOP instruction places the system in STOP mode.
Operand b3b2b1b0 of the STOP instruction is the condition for canceling STOP mode.
Table 15-4. STOP Mode Cancellation Condition
Format: STOP b3b2b1b0B
Bit
STOP Mode Cancellation ConditionNote 1
b3
b2
At 1, this bit enables cancellation by IRQ×××.Note 2, 3
"Fixed to 0"
b1
"Fixed to 0"
"Fixed to 0"
b0
Notes 1. At STOP 0000B, only the resets (RESET input; power-ON/power-DOWN reset) are valid.
The microcontroller is internally initialized to the state immediately following the resetting when STOP
0000B is executed.
2. It is required that IP×××=1. Cancellation by IRQTM is not possible.
3. Even if the STOP instruction is executed when IRQ×××=1, the STOP instruction is ignored (handled
as a NOP instruction) thus failing to place the system in STOP mode.
15.3.2 Start Address after STOP Mode Cancellation
The start address varies depending on the cancellation condition and the interrupt enable condition.
Table 15-5. Start Address After STOP Mode Cancellation
Cancellation Condition
ResetNote 1
Start Address after Cancellation
Address 0
IRQ×××Note 2
If DI, the start address is the one following the STOP instruction
If EI, the start address is the interrupt vector.
(If more than one IRQ××× have been set, the start address is the interrupt
vector with highest priority.)
Notes 1. Valid resets include the RESET input and power-ON/power-DOWN resets.
2. It is required that IP×××=1. Cancellation by IRQTM is not possible.
167
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
Figure 15-2. Cancellation of STOP Mode
(a) STOP cancellation by RESET input
Execution of the
STOP instruction
TM count up
RESET
Operation
mode
STOP mode
System reset state
WAIT b
Operation mode
(Start of address 0)
WAIT b: This refers to the wait time until TM counts the divide-by-256 clock up to 256.
256 × 256/fX+α (when approximately 32 ms+α and fX=2MHz)
α: Oscillation growth time (Varies depending on the resonator)
(b) STOP cancellation by IRQ××× (if DI)
Execution of the
STOP instruction
TM count up
IPQ×××
Operation
mode
STOP mode
WAIT c
Operation mode
WAIT c: This refers to the wait time until TM counts the divide-by-m clock up to (n+1).
(n+1) × m/fX+α (n and m: values immediately before the system is placed in STOP mode)
α: Oscillation growth time (Varies depending on the resonator)
(c) STOP cancellation by IRQ××× (if EI)
Execution of the
STOP instruction
Interrupt operation acceptance, TM count up
IPQ×××
Operation
mode
STOP mode
WAIT c
Operation mode
WAIT c: This refers to the wait time until TM counts the divide-by-m clock up to (n+1).
(n+1) × m/fX+α (n and m: values immediately before the system is placed in STOP mode)
α: Oscillation growth time (Varies depending on the resonator)
168
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
15.3.3 STOP Setting Condition
Cancellation by IRQ×××
Cancellation by IRQ
• Sets the edge selection (IEGMD1, IEGMD0) for the signal that is input from the INT
pin.
• Sets the modulo register value of the timer (wait time for generation of oscillation
stability).
• Clears the interrupt request flag (IRQ) of the INT pin (to 0).
• Sets the interrupt enable flag (IP) of the INT pin (to 1.)
Cancellation by IRQSIO • Sets the source clock to the external clock (SIOCK1=0, SIOCK0=0) that is input from
the SCK pin.
• Sets the serial interface to the operable state (SIOTS=1).
• Sets the modulo register value of the timer (wait time for generation of oscillation
stability).
• Clears the interrupt request flag (IRQSIO) of the serial interface (to 0).
• Sets the interrupt enable flag (IPSIO) of the serial interface (to 1).
Caution Be sure to code a NOP instruction immediately before the STOP instruction. The time of one
instruction is generated between the IRQ××× operation instruction and the STOP instruction by
coding the NOP instruction immediately before the STOP instruction. Therefore, in the case of
the CLR1 IRQ××× instruction, for example, the clearance of IRQ××× is correctly reflected in the
STOP instruction (Example 1). If a NOP instruction is not coded immediately before the STOP
instruction, the CLR1 IRQ××× instruction is not reflected in the STOP instruction thus failing to
place the system in STOP mode (Example 2).
169
CHAPTER 15 STANDBY FUNCTIONS
Example 1. A correct program example
.
.
.
.
.
.
(Setting of IRQ×××)
.
.
.
.
.
.
CLR1 IRQ×××
NOP
; Codes a NOP instruction immediately before the STOP instruction.
; (Clearance of IRQ××× is reflected correctly to the STOP instruction.
STOP 1000B ; Executes the STOP instruction correctly (placing the system in STOP mode).
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. An incorrect program example
.
.
.
.
.
.
(Setting of IRQ×××)
.
.
.
.
.
.
CLR1 IRQ××× ; Clearance of IRQ××× is not reflected to the STOP instruction.
; (It is the instruction following the STOP instruction that is reflected.)
STOP 1000B ; The STOP instruction is ignored (not placing the system in STOP mode.)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
170
CHAPTER 16 RESET
The following 3 types of resets are provided in the µPD17120 series.
<1> Reset by input to RESET.
<2> The power-on/power-down reset function when power is turned on or supply voltage drops.
<3> The address stack overflow/underflow reset function.
16.1 RESET FUNCTIONS
The reset functions are used to initialize device operations. The state to be initialized depends on the type of reset.
Table 16-1. State of Each Hardware Unit When Reset
Reset Type • RESET Input during
Operation
• RESET Input during
Standby Mode
• Stack Overflow or
Underflow
• Built-in Power-ON/Power- • Built-in Power-ON/Power-
DOWN Reset during
Operation
DOWN Reset during
Standby Mode
Hardware
Program Counter
Port
0000H
Input
0000H
Input
0
0000H
Input
Input/Output mode
Output latch
0
Undefined
Undefined
General-Purpose Other than DBF
Data Memory
Undefined
Retains the status immedi-
ately preceding the resetting.
DBF
System Register Other than WR
WR
Undefined
0
Undefined
0
Undefined
0
Undefined
Retains the status immedi-
ately preceding the resetting.
Undefined
Note
Control Register
SP=5H; IRQTM1=1; TMEN=1; CMPVREF23=1
;
SP=5H; INT retains the
Note
CMPRSLT=1
; INT retains the status of the INT pin at status of the INT pin at the
the time; all the others go to 0.
time; all the others go to 0.
Refer to 19.2 RESERVED SYMBOLS.
Timer
Count register
00H
FFH
00H
FFH
Undefined
FFH
Modulo register
Serial Interface's Shift Register
(SIOSFR)
Undefined
Retains the status immedi-
ately preceding the resetting.
Undefined
Note µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, and 17P133 only.
171
CHAPTER 16 RESET
Figure 16-1. Reset Block Configuration
Internal bus
RF : 10H
0
0
0
PDRESEN
Internal reset signal
VDD
Clear signal
Oscillation
disabled
Low-voltage detection circuit
Power-on reset circuit
Mask optionNote
RESET
Note The µPD17P132 and 17P133 have no pull-up resistor by mask option, and are always open.
16.2 RESETTING
Operation when reset is caused by the RESET input is shown in the figure below.
If the RESET pin is set from low to high, system clock generation starts and an oscillation stabilization wait occurs
with the timer. Program execution starts from address 0000H.
If power-on reset function is used, the reset signals shown in Figure 16-2 are internally generated. Operation
is the same as that when reset is caused externally by the RESET input.
At address stack overflow and underflow reset, oscillation stabilization wait time (WAIT a) does not occur.
Operation starts from address 0000H after initial statuses are internally set.
Figure 16-2. Resetting
RESET
TMEN
TMRES
Operationg mode
RESET
WAIT aNote
Operating mode
Note This is oscillation stabilization wait time. Operating mode is set when timer counts system clocks 256 ×
256 time (approx. 8ms, at fX=8 MHz/approx. 32 ms, at fCC=2 MHz)
172
CHAPTER 16 RESET
16.3 POWER-ON/POWER-DOWN RESET FUNCTION
The µPD17120 subseries is provided with two reset functions to prevent malfunctions from occurring in the
microcontroller. They are the power-on reset function and power-down reset function. The power-on reset function
resets the microcontroller when it detects that power was turned on. The power-down reset function resets the
microcontroller when it detects drops in the power voltage.
These functions are implemented by the power-voltage monitoring circuit whose operating voltage has a different
range from the logic circuits in the microcontroller and the oscillation circuit (which stops oscillation at reset to put
the microcontroller in a temporary stop state). Conditions required to enable these functions and their operations
will be described next.
Caution When designing an applied circuit requiring a high level of reliability, make sure that its resetting
relies on the built-in power-on/power-down reset function only. Also, design the circuit in such
a way that the RESET signal is input externally.
16.3.1 Conditions Required to Enable the Power-On Reset Function
This function is effective when used together with the power-down reset function.
The following conditions are required to validate the power-on reset function:
<1> The power voltage must be 4.5 to 5.5 V during normal operation, including the standby state.
<2> The frequency of the system clock oscillator must be 400 kHz to 4 MHz.Note
<3> The power-down reset function must be enabled during normal operation, including the standby state.
<4> The power voltage must rise from 0 V to the specified voltage.
<5> The time it takes for the power voltage to rise from 0 to 2.7 V must be shorter than the oscillation stabilization
wait time counted in timer of the µPD17120 subseries. (System clock 256 × 256 counts: approx. 16 ms,
at fX=4 MHz/approx. 32 ms, at fCC=2 MHz)
Note µPD17121/17133/17P133 only
Cautions 1. If the above conditions are not satisfied, the power-on reset function will not operate
effectively. In this case, an external reset circuit needs to be added.
2. In the standby state, even if the power-down reset function operates normally, general-
purpose data memory (except for DBF) retains data up to VDD=2.7 V. If, however, data is
changed due to an external error, the data in memory is not guaranteed.
173
CHAPTER 16 RESET
16.3.2 Description and Operation of the Power-On Reset Function
The power-on reset function resets the microcontroller when it detects that power was turned on in the hardware,
regardless of the software state.
Thepower-onresetcircuitoperatesunderalowervoltagethantheotherinternalcircuitsintheµPD17120subseries.
It initializes the microcontroller regardless whether the oscillation circuit is operating. When the reset operation is
terminated, timer counts the number of oscillation pulses sent from the oscillator until it reaches the specified value.
Within this period, oscillation becomes stable and the power voltage applied to the microcontroller enters the range
(VDD=2.7 to 5.5 V at 400 kHz to 4 MHzNote) in which the microcontroller is guaranteed to operate.
When this period elapses, the microcontroller enters normal operation mode. Figure 16-3 shows an example of
the power-on reset operation.
Note µPD17121/17133/17P133 only
Operation of the power-on reset circuit
<1> This circuit always monitors the voltage applied to the VDD pin.
<2> This circuit resets the microcontroller Note until power reaches a particular voltage (typically 1.5 V), regardless
whether the oscillation circuit is operating.
<3> This circuit stops oscillation during the reset operation.
<4> When reset is terminated, timer counts oscillation pulses. The microcontroller waits until oscillation becomes
stable and the power voltage becomes VDD=2.7 V or higher.
Note It is from the point when the supply voltage has reached a level allowing the internal circuit to be operable
(accepting the internal reset signal) that the resetting takes effect within the microcontroller.
174
CHAPTER 16 RESET
Figure 16-3. Example of the Power-On Reset Operation
V
DD
(V)
5.0
2.7
A
A : Voltage at which
oscillation starts
B : Voltage at which the
power-on reset operation
terminates
V
DD
RESET µPD17120
Subseries
B
0
GND
Time (t)
Oscillating
Oscillation stop
State of
oscillation
Oscillation start
Timer finishes counting
Guaranteed periodNote 2
Period in which
the microcon-
troller is guar-
anteed to
Undefined
periodNote1
operate
Power-on
reset signal
Operation state
of the micro-
controller
Operating mode
Operation
stopNote 3
Waiting until
oscillation
becomes stable
Power-on reset termination
Notes 1. During the operation-undefined period, certain operations on the µPD17120 subseries are not
guaranteed. However, the power-on reset function is guaranteed in this period.
2. The operation-guaranteed period refers to the time in which all the operations specified for the
µPD17120 subseries are guaranteed.
3. An operation stop state refers to the state in which all of the functions of the microcontroller are
stopped.
175
CHAPTER 16 RESET
16.3.3 Condition Required for Use of the Power-Down Reset Function
The power-down reset function can be enabled or disabled using software. The following conditions are required
to use this function:
• The power voltage must be 4.5 to 5.5 V during normal operation, including the standby state.
• The frequency of the system clock oscillator must be 400 kHz to 4 MHz.Note
Note µPD17121/17133/17P133 only
Caution When the microcontroller is used with a power voltage of 2.7 to 4.5 V, add an external reset circuit
instead of using the internal power-down reset circuit. If the internal power-down reset circuit
is used with a power voltage of 2.7 to 4.5 V, reset operation may not terminate.
16.3.4 Description and Operation of the Power-Down Reset Function
This function is enabled by setting the power-down reset enable flag (PDRESEN) using software.
When this function detects a power voltage drop, it issues the reset signal to the microcontroller. It then initializes
the microcontroller. Stopping oscillation during reset prevents the power voltage in the microcontroller from
fluctuating out of control. When the specified power voltage recovers and the power-down reset operation is
terminated, the microcontroller waits the time required for stable oscillation using the timer. The microcontroller
then enters normal operation (starts from the top of memory).
Figure 16-4 shows an example of the power-down operation. Figure 16-5 shows an example of reset operation
during the period from power-down reset to power recovery.
Operation of the power-down reset circuit
<1> This circuit always monitors the voltage applied to the VDD pin.
<2> When this circuit detects a power voltage drop, it issues a reset signal to the other parts of the microcontroller.
It continues to send this reset signal until the power voltage recovers or all the functions in the microcontroller
stop.
<3> This circuit stops oscillation during the reset operation to prevent software crashes.
When the power voltage recovers to the low-voltage detection level (typically 3.5 V, 4.5 V maximum) before
the power-down reset function stops, the microcontroller waits the time required for stable oscillation using
timer, then enters normal operation mode.
<4> When the power voltage recovers from 0 V, the power-on reset function has priority.
<5> After the power-down reset function stops and the power voltage recovers before it reaches 0 V, the
microcontroller waits using timer until oscillation becomes stable and the power voltage (VDD) reaches
2.7 V. The microcontroller then enters normal operation mode.
176
CHAPTER 16 RESET
Figure 16-4. Example of the Power-Down Reset Operation
V
DD
(V)
5.0
Maximum voltage detected by the
power-down reset function: 4.5V
4.5
3.5
Typical voltage detected by the
power-down reset function: 3.5V
VDD
Voltage at which the power-down
reset function terminates=
power-on reset voltage (B): C
RESET µPD17120
Subseries
2.7
C
GND
0
Time (t)
Oscillating
State of
oscillation
Oscillation stop
Period in which
the microcon-
troller is guar-
anteed to
Undefined periodNote
Guaranteed period
operate
Power-down
reset signal
Power-on
reset signal
Operation state
of the micro-
controller
Oscillating
mode
Reset state
Power-down reset
Note The undefined operation area refers to the area in which operation specified for the µPD17120 subseries
is not assured. However, even in this area, the power-down reset function operates, thus continuing to
generate resets until all the other functions within the microcontroller are stopped.
177
CHAPTER 16 RESET
Figure 16-5. Example of Reset Operation during the Period from Power-Down Reset to Power Recovery
V
DD
(V)
5.0
4.5
3.5
Maximum voltage detected by the
power-down reset function: 4.5V
Typical voltage detected by the
power-down reset function: 3.5V
2.7
C
Voltage at which the power-down
reset function terminates=
power-on reset voltage (B): C
0
Time (t)
V
DD
Oscillating
Oscillating
Oscillation stop
State of
oscillation
RESET µPD17120
Subseries
Timer finishes counting
Guaranteed period
Undefined periodNote
GND
Period in which
the microcon-
troller is guar-
anteed to
Guaranteed period
operate
Power-down
reset signal
Power-on
reset signal
Operation state
of the micro-
controller
Oscillating
mode
Reset state
Operating mode
Power-down reset
Waiting until oscillation
becomes stable
Note The undefined operation area refers to the area in which operation specified for the µPD17120 subseries
is not assured. However, even in this area, the power-down reset function operates, thus continuing to
generate resets until all the other functions within the microcontroller are stopped.
178
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING
The on-chip program memory of the µPD17P132 and 17P133 is a 1024 × 16-bit one-time PROM.
Pins listed in Table 17-1 are used for one-time PROM writing/verifying. The address is updated by the clock signal
input from the CLK pin.
Caution INT/VPP pin is used as VPP pin in program writing/verifying mode. Therefore, there is a possibility
of overrunning of the microcontroller when voltage higher than VDD + 0.3 V is applied to INT/
VPP pin in normal operation mode. Pay careful attention to ESD protection.
Table 17-1. Pins Used for Writing/Verifying Program Memory
Pin
Function
Applies program voltage. Apply 12.5 V to this pin.
Power supply pin. Apply 6 V to this pin.
Clock input for updating address. Updates program memory address
by inputting four pulses.
VPP
VDD
CLK
MD0-MD3
D0-D7
Select operation mode.
8-bit data I/O pins.
17.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MASK ROM VERSION AND ONE-TIME PROM VERSION
The µPD17P132 and 17P133 are microcontrollers replacing the program memory of the on-chip mask ROM version
µPD17132 and 17133 to one-time PROM. Table 17-2 shows the differences between mask ROM version and one-
time PROM version.
Differences between each products are only its capacity of ROM/RAM, and whether it can specify mask option
or not. The CPU function and internal peripheral hardware of each product (excluding comparator) are the same.
Therefore, at system designing, the µPD17P132 can be used for evaluating program of the µPD17120/17132 . Also,
the µPD17P133 can be used for evaluating the µPD17121/17133 in the same way.
179
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING
Table 17-2. Differences Between Mask ROM Version and One-Time PROM Version
Item
µPD17120
µPD17132
µPD17P132
µPD17121
µPD17133
µPD17P133
ROM
Mask ROM
One-time PROM
Mask ROM
One-time PROM
768 × 16 bit
1024 × 16 bit
768 × 16 bit
1024 × 16 bit
(0000H-02FFH)
(0000H-03FFH)
(0000H-02FFH)
(0000H-03FFH)
RAM
64 × 4 bit
111 × 4 bit
64 × 4 bit
111 × 4 bit
P0D and P0E pins and pull-
up resistor of RESET pin
Mask option
Not available
Mask option
Not available
VPP pin, operating mode
selection pin
Not available
Available
Not available
Available
Operating frequency
fCC=400 kHz to 2.4 MHz
fX=400 KHz to 4 MHz (VDD=2.7 to 5.5 V)
fX=400 kHz to 8 MHz (VDD=4.5 to 5.5 V)
Comparator
Not available
Available
Not available
Available
Caution Although, functionally, the PROM product is highly compatible with the masked ROM product,
they still differ from each other in terms of their internal ROM circuits and some electrical
features. When switching from a PROM product to a ROM product, ensure to make sufficient
application evaluations based on masked-ROM product samples.
17.2 OPERATING MODE IN PROGRAM MEMORY WRITING/VERIFYING
The µPD17P132 and 17P133 become program memory writing/verifying mode by applying +6V to VDD pin and
+12.5 V to VPP pin after reset state for a fixed time (VDD=5 V, RESET=0 V). This mode becomes the following operating
mode by the setting of pins MD0 to MD3. Regarding pins other than those shown in Table 17-1, connect them all
individually to the GND through pull-down resistors.
For details, refer to 1.4 (2).
Table 17-3. Operating Mode Setting
Operating Mode Setting
Operating Mode
VPP
VDD
MD0
H
MD1
MD2
H
MD3
L
L
H
L
Clear program memory address to 0.
Write mode
L
H
H
+12.5 V +6 V
L
H
H
Verify mode
H
×
H
H
Program inhibit mode
Remark ×: don't care (L or H)
180
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING
17.3 WRITING PROCEDURE OF PROGRAM MEMORY
The program memory can be written at high speeds in the following procedure.
(1) Pull down the unused pins to GND. (XOUT pin is open.) Mask the CLK pin low.
(2) Apply 5 V to the VDD pin. Make VPP pin low.
(3) Wait for 10 µs. Then, apply 5 V to VPP pin.
(4) Set the program memory address 0 clear mode using mode selector pins.
(5) Apply 6 V to VDD and 12.5 V to VPP.
(6) Set the program inhibit mode.
(7) Write data in mode for 1 ms writing.
(8) Set the program inhibit mode.
(9) Set the verify mode (MD0-MD3=LLHH). If the program has been correctly written, proceed to (10).
If not, repeat (7) through (9).
(10) Additional writing of (number of times (×) the program has been written in (7) through (9)) × 1ms.
(11) Set the program inhibit mode.
(12) Input four pulses to the CLK pin to update the program memory address by one.
(13) Repeat (7) through (12) until the last address in programmed.
(14) Set the program memory address 0 clear mode.
(15) Change the voltage of VDD and VPP pins to 5 V.
(16) Turn off the power.
Figure 17-1 shows the procedures of (2) through (12).
181
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING
Figure 17-1. Procedure of program Memory Writing
Repeat × times
Reset
Additional
writing
Address
increment
Write
Verify
VDD+1
VDD
GND
VDD
VPP
VPP
VDD
GND
CLK
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Output data
D0–D7
Input data
Input data
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
17.4 READING PROCEDURE OF PROGRAM MEMORY
(1) Pull down the unused pins to GND. (XOUT pin is open.) Make the CLK pin low.
(2) Apply 5 V to the VDD pin. Make VPP pin low.
(3) Wait for 10 µs. Then, apply 5 V to VPP pin.
(4) Set the program memory address 0 clear mode using mode selector pins.
(5) Apply 6 V to VDD and 12.5 V to VPP.
(6) Set mode selector pins to the program inhibit mode.
(7) Set the verify mode. When clock pulses are input to the CLK pin, data for each address can be sequentially
output with four clocks as one cycle.
(8) Set the program inhibit mode.
(9) Set the program memory address 0 clear mode.
(10) Change the voltage of VDD and VPP pins to 5 V.
(11) Turn off the power.
182
CHAPTER 17 ONE-TIME PROM WRITING/VERIFYING
Figure 17-2 shows the program reading procedure (2) through (9).
Figure 17-2. Procedure of Program Memory Reading
Reset
VDD+1
VDD
GND
VDD
VPP
VPP
VDD
GND
CLK
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
D0–D7
Output data
Output data
MD0
"L"
MD1
MD2
MD3
183
[MEMO]
184
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.1 OVERVIEW OF THE INSTRUCTION SET
b15
b14-b11
0
1
BIN
HEX
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADD
SUB
ADDC
SUBC
AND
XOR
OR
r, m
r, m
r, m
r, m
r, m
r, m
r, m
AR
ADD
SUB
ADDC
SUBC
AND
XOR
OR
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
INC
INC
IX
MOVT
BR
DBF, @AR
@AR
CALL
RET
@AR
RETSK
EI
DI
0111
7
RETI
PUSH
POP
GET
AR
AR
DBF, p
p, DBF
WR, rf
rf, WR
r
PUT
PEEK
POKE
RORC
STOP
HALT
NOP
LD
s
h
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
8
9
r, m
ST
m, r
SKE
m, #n4
@r, m
m, #n4
addr
SKGE
MOV
SKLT
CALL
MOV
SKT
m, #n4
m, @r
m, #n4
addr
A
B
C
D
E
F
MOV
SKNE
BR
m, #n4
m, #n
m, #n
SKF
185
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.2 LEGEND
AR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Address register
ASR
addr
BANK
CMP
CY
Address stack register indicated by stack pointer
Program memory address (11 bits, the most-significant bit is fixed to 0)
Bank register
Compare flag
Carry flag
DBF
h
Data buffer
Halt release condition
INTEF
INTR
INTSK
IX
Interrupt enable flag
Register saved automatically to stack when interrupt occurs
Interrupt stack register
Index register
MP
Data memory row address pointer
Memory pointer enable flag
Data memory address indicated by mR and mC
Data memory row address (upper)
Data memory column address (lower)
Bit position (4 bits)
MPE
m
mR
mC
n
n4
PC
p
Immediate data (4 bits)
Program counter
Peripheral address
pH
pL
Peripheral address (upper 3 bits)
Peripheral address (lower 4 bits)
General register column address
Register file address
r
rf
rfR
rfC
Register file row address (upper 3 bits)
Register file column address (lower 4 bits)
Stack pointer
SP
s
Stop release condition
WR
(×)
Window register
Contents addressed by ×
186
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.3 LIST OF THE INSTRUCTION SET
Machine Code
Operand
Group Mnemonic Operand
Operation
OP Code
Add
ADD
ADDC
INC
r, m
(r) ← (r) + (m)
00000
10000
00010
10010
00111
00111
00001
10001
00011
10011
00110
10110
00100
10100
00101
10101
11110
mR
mR
mR
mR
000
000
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mR
mC
mC
r
n4
r
m, #n4
r, m
(m) ← (m) + n4
(r) ← (r) + (m) + CY
(m) ← (m) + n4 + CY
AR ← AR + 1
mC
m, #n4
AR
mC
n4
0000
0000
r
1001
1000
mC
IX
IX ← IX + 1
Subtract SUB
r, m
(r) ← (r) – (m)
m, #n4
r, m
(m) ← (m) – n4
(r) ← (r) – (m) –CY
(m) ← (m) – n4 –CY
(r) ← (r) (m)
mC
n4
r
SUBC
mC
m, #n4
r, m
mC
n4
r
Logical
OR
mC
Operation
m, #n4
r, m
(m) ← (m) n4
(r) ← (r) (m)
mC
n4
r
AND
XOR
mC
m, #n4
r, m
(m) ← (m) n4
(r) ← (r) (m)
mC
n4
r
mC
m, #n4
m, #n
(m) ← (m) n4
mC
n4
n
Test
SKT
SKF
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=n, then skip
mC
m, #n
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=0, then skip
11111
01001
mR
mR
mC
mC
n
Compare SKE
SKNE
m, #n4
(m) –n4, skip if zero
n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
m, #n4
(m) –n4, skip if not zero
(m) –n4, skip if not borrow
(m) –n4, skip if borrow
01011
11001
11011
mR
mR
mR
mC
mC
mC
n4
n4
n4
SKGE
SKLT
Rotate
RORC
r
CY → (r)b3 → (r)b2 → (r)b1 → (r)b0
00111
000
0111
r
Transfer LD
ST
r, m
(r) ← (m)
(m) ← (r)
01000
11000
01010
mR
mR
mR
mC
mC
mC
r
r
r
m, r
MOV
@r, m
if MPE = 1: (MP, (r)) ← (m)
if MPE = 0: (BANK, mR, (r)) ← (m)
m, @r
if MPE = 1: (m) ← (MP, (r))
11010
mR
mC
r
if MPE = 0: (m) ← (BANK, mR, (r))
m, #n4
(m) ← n4
11101
00111
mR
mC
n4
MOVTNote DBF, @AR SP ← SP–1, ASR ← PC, PC ← AR,
DBF ← (PC), PC ← ASR,
000
0001
0000
SP ← SP+1
Note As an exception, execution of MOVT instruction requires two instruction cycles.
187
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Machine Code
Operand
Group Mnemonic Operand
Operation
OP Code
Transfer PUSH
AR
SP ← SP – 1, ASR ← AR
00111
00111
00111
00111
00111
00111
01100
00111
11100
000
000
rfR
1101
1100
0011
0010
1011
1010
addr
0000
0000
rfC
POP
PEEK
POKE
GET
AR
AR ← ASR, SP ← SP + 1
WR ← (rf)
WR, rf
rf, WR
DBF, p
p, DBF
addr
(rf) ← WR
rfR
rfC
DBF ← (p)
PH
PL
PUT
(p) ← DBF
PH
PL
Branch
BR
PC ← addr
@AR
addr
PC ← AR
000
000
0100
addr
0000
0000
Sub-
CALL
SP ← SP – 1, ASR ← PC,
PC ← addr
routine
@AR
SP ← SP – 1, ASR ← PC,
PC ← AR
00111
0101
RET
PC ← ASR, SP ← SP+1
PC ← ASR, SP ← SP+1 and skip
PC ← ASR, INTR ← INTSK, SP ← SP+1
INTEF ← 1
00111
00111
00111
00111
000
001
100
000
1110
1110
1110
1111
0000
0000
0000
0000
RETSK
RETI
Interrupt EI
DI
INTEF ← 0
00111
00111
001
010
1111
1111
0000
s
Others
STOP
s
STOP
HALT
NOP
h
HALT
00111
00111
011
100
1111
1111
h
No operation
0000
18.4 ASSEMBLER (AS17K) MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
Legend
flag n : FLG symbol
<
>
: Can be omitted
Mnemonic
SKTn
Operand
flag 1, …flag n
flag 1, …flag n
Operation
n
Macro
if (flag 1) ~ (flag n)=all "1" then skip
if (flag 1) ~ (flag n)=all "0", then skip
1≤n≤4
1≤n≤4
Instructions SKFn
SETn
CLRn
NOTn
flag 1, …flag n
flag 1, …flag n
flag 1, …flag n
(flag 1) ~ (flag n) ← 1
(flag 1) ~ (flag n) ← 0
1≤n≤4
1≤n≤4
1≤n≤4
if (flag n)="0", then (flag n) ← 1
if (flag n)="1", then (flag n) ← 0
INITFLG
<NOT> flag 1,
if description=NOT flag n, then (flag n) ← 0
if description=flag n, then (flag n) ← 1
1≤n≤4
… <<NOT> flag n>
BANKn
(BANK) ← n
n=0
188
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.5 INSTRUCTIONS
18.5.1 Addition Instructions
(1) Add r, m
Add data memory to general register
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
00000
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (r) ← (r) + (m)
Adds the data memory contents to the general register contents, and stores the result in general register.
When CMP=1, (r) + (m)
The result is not stored in the register. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a carry occurs as a result of the addition. Resets the carry flag CY, if no carry occurs.
If the addition result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
189
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Addition can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for the PSWORD specifies which kind of
addition is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Adds the address 0.2FH contents to the address 0.03H contents, when row address 0 (0.00H-0.0FH) in bank
0 is specified as the general register (RPH=0, RPL=0), and stores the result in address 0.03H:
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.2FH)
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
ADD
MEM003, MEM02F
Example 2
Adds the address 0.2FH contents to the address 0.23H contents, when row address 2 (0.20H-0.2FH) in bank
0 is specified as the general register (RPH=0, RPL=4), and stores the result in address 0.23H:
(0.23H) ← (0.23H) + (0.2FH)
MEM023 MEM 0.23H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #04H
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0Note
; General register row address 2
ADD
MEM023, MEM02F
Note
RP
Register
RPH
b2 b1
RPL
Bit
b3
0
b0
0
b3
b2
b1
b0
B
C
D
Bank
0
0
Row
Address
Data
190
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
RP (general register pointer) is assigned in the system register, as shown above.
Therefore, to set bank 0 and row address 2 in a general register, 00H must be stored in RPH and 04H,
in RPL.
In this case, the subsequent arithmetic operation is executed in binary 4-bit operation, because the BCD
flag is reset.
Example 3
Adds the address 0.6FH contents to the address 0.03H contents and stores the result in address 0.03H. At
this time, data memory address 0.6FH can be specified, by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1,
IXH=0, IXM=4, and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.40H.
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.6FH)
Address obtained as result of ORing index register con-
tents, 0.40H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00001000000B
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM003, MEM02F ; IX
00001000000B (0.40H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00001101111B (0.6FH)
Example 4
Adds the address 0.3FH contents to the address 0.03H contents and stores the result in address 0.03H. At
this time, data memory address 0.3FH can be specified by specifying data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1,
IXH=0, IXM=1, and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.10H.
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.3FH)
Address obtained as result of ORing index register contents,
0.10H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
191
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #01H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00000010000B (0.10H)Note
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM003, MEM02F ; IX
00000010000B (0.10H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00100111111B (0.3FH)
Note
IX
Register
IXH
IXM
IXL
Bit
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
b3
b2
b1
b0
M
P
Bank
0
0
0
0
Row
Address
Data
E
Column
address
IX (index register) is assigned in the system register, as shown above.
Therefore, to specify IX=0.10H, 00H must be stored in IXH. 01H in IXM, and 00H in IXL.
In this case, MP (memory pointer) for general register indirect transfer is invalid, because the MPE flag
(memory pointer enable) is reset.
<4> Note
The first operand for the ADD r, m instruction is a column address in general register. Therefore, if the
instruction is described as follows, the column address for the general register is 03H.
MEM013 MEM 0.13H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
ADD
MEM013, MEM02F
Indicates the general register column address.
The lower 4 bits (in this case, 03H) are valid
When CMP flag=1, the addition result is not stored.
When BCD flag=1, the BCD result is stored.
192
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(2) ADD m, #n4
<1> OP code
Add immediate data to data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
10000
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (m) ← (m) + n4
Adds immediate data to the data memory contents, and stores the result in data memory.
When CMP=1, (m) + n4
The result is not stored in the data memory. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the
result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a carry occurs as a result of the addition; resets the carry flag CY if no carry occurs.
If the addition result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the addition result is zero with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the addition result is zero with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Addition can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for the PSWORD specifies which kind of
addition is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Adds 5 to the address 0.2FH contents, and stores the result in address 0.2FH:
(0.2FH) ← (0.2FH) + 5
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
ADD MEM02F, #05H
Example 2
Adds 5 to the address 0.6FH contents and stores the result in address 0.6FH. At this time, data memory
address 0.6FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=4, and IXL=0,
i.e., IX=0.40H.
193
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(0.6FH) ← (0.6FH) + 05H
Address obtained as result of ORing index register contents,
0.40H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
;
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM02F, #05H
; IX
00001000000B (0.40H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00001101111B (0.6FH)
Example 3
Adds 5 to the address 0.2FH contents and stores the result in address 0.2FH. At this time, data memory
address 0.2FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=0, and IXL=0,
i.e., IX=0.00H.
(2.2FH) ← (0.2FH) + 05H
Address obtained as result of ORing index register contents,
0.00H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #00H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00000000000B
;
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM02F, #05H
; IX
00000000000B (0.00H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00000101111B (0.2FH)
<4> Note
When the CMP flag=1, the addition result is not stored.
When the BCD flag=1, the BCD result is stored.
194
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(3) ADDC r, m
<1> OP code
Add data memory to general register with carry flag
10
8 7
4 3
0
00010
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (r) ← (r) + (m) +CY
Adds the data memory contents to the general register contents with carry flag CY, and stores the result
in general register indentified as r.
When CMP=1, (r) + (m) + CY
The result is not stored in the register. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed according to the result.
By using this ADDC instruction, two or more words can be easily added.
Sets carry flag CY, if a carry occurs as a result of the addition; resets the carry flag CY if no carry occurs.
If the addition result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Addition can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for program status word PSWORD specifies
which kind of addition is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Adds the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH to the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.2DH
through 0.2FH, and stores the result in the 12-bit contents for address 0.0DH to 0.0FH, when row address
0 (0.00H-0.0FH) of bank 0 is specified as a general register:
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) + (0.2FH)
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) + (0.2EH) + CY
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) + (0.2DH) + CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
195
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM02D MEM 0.2DH
MEM02E MEM 0.2EH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
ADD
MEM00F, MEM02F
ADDC MEM00E, MEM02E
ADDC MEM00D, MEM02D
Example 2
Shifts the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.2DH through 0.2FH and the carry flag by 1 bit to the left, when
row address 2 in bank 0 (0.20H-0.2FH) is specified as a general register.
CY
(carry flag)
Bank 0
Address 0DH
Bank 0
Address 0EH
Bank 0
Address 0FH
CY
(carry flag)
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MEM02D MEM 0.2DH
MEM02E MEM 0.2EH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV RPH, #00H
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 2
; Data memory bank 0
MOV RPL, #04H
MOV BANK, #00H
ADDC MEM00F, MEM02F
ADDC MEM00E, MEM02E
ADDC MEM00D, MEM02D
Example 3
Adds the address 0.0FH contents to the addresses 0.40H through 0.4FH contents, and stores the result in
address 0.0FH:
196
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
…
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) + (0.40H) + (0.41H) + + (0.4FH)
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MOV BANK, #00H
; Data memory bank 0
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
LOOP1:
SET1 IXE
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM00F, MEM000
CLR1 IXE
; IXE flag ← 0
; IX ← IX + 1
INC
IX
SKE
JMP
IXL, #0
LOOP1
Example 4
Adds the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.40H through 0.42H to the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0DH
through 0.0FH, and stores the result in 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH:
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) + (0.40H)
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) + (0.41H) + CY
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) + (0.42H) + CY
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM001 MEM 0.01H
MEM002 MEM 0.02H
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00001000000 (0.40H)
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM00D, MEM000 ; (0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) + (0.40H)
197
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
ADDC MEM00E, MEM001 ; (0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) + (0.41H)
ADDC MEM00F, MEM002 ; (0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) + (0.42H)
(4) ADDC m, #n4
<1> OP code
Add immediate data to data memory with carry flag
10
8 7
4 3
0
10010
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (m) ← (m) + n4 + CY
Add immediate data to the data memory contents with carry flag (CY), and stores the result in data memory.
When CMP=1, (m) + n4 + CY
The result is not stored in the data memory, and carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the
result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a carry occurs as a result of the addition. Resets the carry flag CY, if no carry occurs.
If the addition result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the addition result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Addition can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for PSWORD specifies which kind of addition
is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Adds 5 to the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH, and stores the result in addresses 0.0DH
through 0.0FH;
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) + 05H
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) + CY
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) + CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
198
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV BANK, #00H
; Data memory bank 0
ADD
MEM00F, #05H
ADDC MEM00E, #00H
ADDC MEM00D, #00H
Example 2
Adds 5 to the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.4DH through 0.4FH, and stores the result in addresses 0.4DH
through 0.4FH;
(0.4FH) ← (0.4FH) + 05H
(0.4EH) ← (0.4EH) + CY
(0.4DH) ← (0.4DH) + CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
; IXE flag ← 1
ADD
MEM00F, #5
; (0.4FH) ← (0.4FH) + 5H
; (0.4EH) ← (0.4EH) + CY
; (0.4DH) ← (0.4DH) + CY
ADDC MEM00E, #0
ADDC MEM00D, #0
(5) INC AR
<1> OP code
Increment address register
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
000
1001
0000
<2> Function
AR ← AR + 1
Increments the address register AR contents.
199
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
Adds 1 to the 16-bit contents for AR3 through AR0 (address registers) in the system register and stores the
result in AR3 through AR0:
AR0 ← AR0 + 1
AR1 ← AR1 + CY
AR2 ← AR2 + CY
AR3 ← AR3 + CY
INC AR
This instruction can be rewritten as follows, with addition instructions:
ADD
AR0, #01H
ADDC AR1, #00H
ADDC AR2, #00H
ADDC AR3, #00H
Example 2
Transfers table data, 16 bits (1 address) at a time, to DBF (data buffer), using the table reference instruction
(for details, refer to 10.2.3 Table Reference):
; Address
Table data
0F3FFH
0A123H
0FFF1H
0FFF5H
0FF11H
010H
011G
012H
013H
014H
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
AR3, #0H
AR2, #0H
AR1, #1H
AR0, #0H
; Sets table data address
; 0010H in address register
;
LOOP:
MOVT
@AR
; Reads table data to DBF
:
:
:
:
; Table data reference processing
200
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
INC
BR
AR
; Increments address register by 1
LOOP
<4> Note
The higher 6 bits of address register are fixed to 0. Only lower 10 bits can be used.
(6) INC IX
<1> OP code
Increment index register
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
000
1000
0000
<2> Function
IX ← IX + 1
Increments the index register IX contents.
<3> Example 1
Adds 1 to the total of 12-bit contents for IXH, IXM, and IXL (index registers) in the system register and stores
the result in IXH, IXM, and IXL;
;
;
;
IXL ← IXL + 1
IXM ← IXM + CY
IXH ← IXH + CY
INC IX
This program can be rewritten as follows, with addition instructions:
ADD
IXL, #01H
ADDC IXM, #00H
ADDC IXH, #00H
Example 2
Clears all the contents for data memory addresses 0.00H through 0.73H to 0, using the index register:
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #00H
MOV IXL, #00H
; Sets index register contents in 00H in bank 0
RAM clear:
MEM000
MEM 0.00H
SET1 IXE
; IXE flag ← 1
201
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MOV MEM000, #00H
CLR1 IXE
INC IX
SET2 CMP, Z
SUB IXL, #03H
; Writes 0 to data memory indicated by index register
; IXE flag ← 0
; CMP flag ← 1, Z flag ← 1
; Checks whether index register contents
; are 73H in bank 0
SUBC IXM, #07H
SUBC IXH, #00H
;
SKT1
BR
Z
; Loops until contents of index register becomes
; 73H of bank 0
RAM clear
18.5.2 Subtraction Instructions
(1) SUB r, m
Subtract data memory from general register
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
00001
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (r) ← (r) – (m)
Subtracts the data memory contents from the general register contents, and stores the result in general
register.
When CMP=1, (r) – (m)
The result is not stored in the register. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a borrow occurs as a result of the subtraction. Resets the carry flag, if no borrow occurs.
If the subtraction result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Subtraction can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for program status word PSWORD specifies
which kind of subtraction is to be executed.
202
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
Subtracts the address 0.2FH contents from the address 0.03H contents, and stores the result in address
0.03H, when row address 0 (0.00H-0.0FH) in bank 0 is specified as a general register (RPH=0, RPL=0):
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.2FH)
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
SUB
MEM003, MEM02F
Example 2
Subtracts the address 0.2FH contents from the address 0.23H contents, when row address 2 (0.20H-0.2FH)
in bank 0 is specified as the general register (RPH=0, RPL=4), and stores the result in address 0.23H:
(0.23H) ← (0.23H) – (0.2FH)
MEM023 MEM 0.23H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #04H
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 2
SUB
MEM023, MEM02F
Example 3
Subtracts the address 0.6FH contents from the address 0.03H contents and stores the result in address
0.03H. At this time, data memory address 0.6FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH,
if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=4, and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.40H.
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.6FH)
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
;
;
203
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
SET1 IXE
SUB
; IXE flag ← 1
MEM003, MEM02F ; IX
00001000000B (0.40H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00001101111B (0.6FH)
Example 4
Subtracts the address 0.3FH contents from the address 0.03H contents and stores the result in address
0.03H. At this time, data memory address 0.3FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH,
if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=1, and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.10H.
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) + (0.3FH)
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #01H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00000010000B (0.10H)
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
SUB
MEM003, MEM02F ; IX
00000010000B (0.10H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00000111111B (0.3FH)
<4> Note
The first operand for the SUB r, m instruction must be a general register address. Therefore, if the instruction
is described as follows, address 03H is specified as a register:
MEM013 MEM 0.13H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
SUB
MEM013, MEM02F
General register address must be in 00H-0FH range
(set register pointer row address other than 1).
When the CMP flag=1, the subtraction result is not stored.
When the BCD flag=1, the BCD result is stored.
204
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(2) SUB m, #n4
<1> OP code
Subtract immediate data from data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
10001
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (m) ← (m) – n4
Subtracts immediate data from the data memory contents, and stores the result in data memory.
When CMP=0, (m) – n4
The result is not stored in data memory. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a borrow occurs as a result of the subtraction. Resets the carry flag CY, if no borrow
occurs.
If the subtraction result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Subtraction can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for program status word PSWORD specifies
which kind of subtraction is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Subtracts 5 from the address 0.2FH contents, and stores the result in address 0.2FH:
(0.2FH) ← (0.2FH) – 5
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
SUB
MEM02F, #05H
Example 2
To subtract 5 from the address 0.6FH contents and store the result in address 0.6FH. At this time, data
memory address 0.6FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=4,
and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.40H.
205
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(0.6FH) ← (0.6FH) – 5
Address obtained as a result of ORing index register contents,
0.40H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
SUB
MEM02F, #05H
; IX
00001000000B (0.40H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00001101111B (0.6FH)
Example 3
Subtracts 5 from the address 0.2FH contents and stores the result in address 0.2FH. At this time, data
memory address 0.2FH can be specified by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=0,
and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.00H.
(0.2FH) ← (0.2FH) – 5
Address obtained as a result of ORing index register contents,
0.00H, and data memory address 0.2FH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV BANK0, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #00H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00000000000B (0.00H)
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
SUB
MEM02F, #05H
; IX
00000000000B (0.00H)
; Bank operand OR)00000101111B (0.2FH)
; Specified address 00000101111B (0.2FH)
<4> Note
When the CMP flag=1, the subtraction result is not stored.
When the BCD flag=1, the BCD result is stored.
206
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(3) SUBC r, m
<1> OP code
Subtract data memory from general register with carry flag
10
8 7
4 3
0
00011
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (r) ← (r) – (m) – CY
Subtracts the data memory contents and the value of carry flag CY from the general register contents. Stores
the result in general register. By using this SUBC instruction, 2 or more words can be easily subtracted.
When CMP=1, (r) – (m) – CY
The result is not stored in the register. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a borrow occurs as a result of the subtraction. Resets the carry flag CY, if no borrow
occurs.
If the subtraction result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Subtraction can be executed in binary 4-bit or BCD. The BCD flag for program status word PSWORD specifies
which kind of subtraction is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Subtracts the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.2DH through 0.2FH from the 12-bit contents for addresses
0.0DH through 0.0FH and stores the result in 12 bits for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH, when row address
0 (0.00H-0.0FH) in bank 0 is specified as a general register:
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) – (0.2FH)
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) – (0.2EH) – CY
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) + (0.2DH) – CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
207
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM02D MEM 0.2DH
MEM02E MEM 0.2EH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
SUB
MEM00F, MEM02F
SUBC MEM00E, MEM02E
SUBC MEM00D, MEM02D
Example 2
Subtracts the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.40H through 0.42H from the 12-bit contents for addresses
0.0DH through 0.0FH, and stores the result in 12 bits for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH.
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) – (0.40H)
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) – (0.41H) – CY
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) – (0.42H) – CY
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM001 MEM 0.01H
MEM002 MEM 0.02H
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
SUB
MEM00D, MEM000 ; (0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) – (0.40H)
SUBC MEM00E, MEM001 ; (0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) – (0.41H)
SUBC MEM00F, MEM002 ; (0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) – (0.42H)
Example 3
Compares the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0CH through 0.0FH with the 12-bit contents for addresses
0.00H through 0.03H. Jumps to LAB1, if the contents are the same, if not, jumps to LAB2:
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM001 MEM 0.01H
MEM002 MEM 0.02H
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
208
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM00C MEM 0.0CH
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
SET2 CMP, Z
; CMP flag ← 1, Z flag ← 1
MEM000, MEM00C ; Contents for addresses 0.00H-0.03H do not change,
SUB
SUBC MEM001, MEM00D ; because CMP flag is set
SUBC MEM002, MEM00E ;
SUBC MEM003, MEM00F
;
SKF1
BR
Z
; Z flag=1, if contents are the same; if not, Z flag=0
;
LAB1
LAB2
BR
LAB1:
LAB2:
(4) SUBC m, #n4
<1> OP code
Subtract immediate data from data memory with carry flag
10
8 7
4 3
0
10011
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
When CMP=0, (m) ← (m) – n4 – CY
Subtracts immediate data and the value of carry flag CY from the data memory contents, and stores the result
in data memory.
When CMP=1, (m) – n4 – CY
The result is not stored in the data memory. Carry flag CY and zero flag Z are changed, according to the
result.
Sets carry flag CY, if a borrow occurs as a result of the subtraction. Resets the carry flag CY, if no borrow
occurs.
If the subtraction result is other than zero, zero flag Z is reset, regardless of compare flag CMP.
209
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag reset (CMP=0), the zero flag Z is set.
If the subtraction result is zero, with the compare flag set (CMP=1), the zero flag Z is not changed.
Subtraction can be executed in binary or BCD. The BCD flag for program status word PSWORD specifies
which kind of subtraction is to be executed.
<3> Example 1
Subtracts 5 from the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.0DH through 0.0FH and stores the result in addresses
0.0DH through 0.0FH:
(0.0FH) ← (0.0FH) – 05H
(0.0EH) ← (0.0EH) – CY
(0.0DH) ← (0.0DH) – CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
SUB
MEM00F, #05H
SUBC MEM00E, #00H
SUBC MEM00D, #00H
Example 2
To subtract 5 from the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.4DH through 0.4FH and store the result in addresses
0.4DH through 0.4FH:
(0.4FH) ← (0.4FH) – 05H
(0.4EH) ← (0.4EH) – CY
(0.4DH) ← (0.4DH) – CY
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV BANK, #00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; Data memory bank 0
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
;
;
; IXE flag ← 1
SUB
MEM00F, #5
; (0.4FH) ← (0.4FH) – 5
; (0.4EH) ← (0.4EH) – CY
; (0.4DH) ← (0.4DH) – CY
SUBC MEM00E, #0
SUBC MEM00D, #0
210
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Example 3
Compares the 12-bit contents for addresses 0.00H through 0.03H with immediate data 0A3FH.
Jumps to LAB1, if the contents are the same; if not, jumps to LAB2:
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM001 MEM 0.01H
MEM002 MEM 0.02H
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
SET2 CMP, Z
; CMP flag ← 1, Z flag ← 1
SUB
MEM000, #0H
; Contents for addresses 0.00H–0.03H do not
SUBC MEM001, #0AH
SUBC MEM002, #3H
SUBC MEM003, #0FH
; change, because CMP flag is set
;
;
SKF1
BR
Z
; Z flag=1, if contents are the same; if not, Z flag=0
;
LAB1
LAB2
BR
LAB1:
LAB2:
18.5.3 Logical Operation Instructions
(1) OR r, m
OR between general register and data memory
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
00110
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
(r) ← (r) (m)
ORs the general register contents with data memory contents. Stores the result in general register.
211
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
To OR the address 0.03H contents (1010B) and the address 0.2FH contents (0111B) and store the result
(1111B) in address 0.03H:
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) (0.2FH)
1
0
1
0
Address 03H
OR
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Address 2FH
Address 03H
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV MEM003, #1010B
MOV MEM02F, #0111B
OR
MEM003, MEM02F
(2) OR m, #n4
<1> OP code
OR between data memory and immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
10110
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) ← (m) n4
ORs the data memory contents and immediate data. Stores the result in data memory.
<3> Example 1
To set bit 3 (MSB) for address 0.03H:
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) 1000B
Address 0.03
1
×
×
×
× : don't care
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
OR MEM003, #1000B
212
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Example 2
Sets all the bits for address 0.03H:
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
OR
MEM003, #1111B
or,
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MOV MEM003, #0FH
(3) AND r, m
<1> OP code
AND between general register and data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
00100
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
(r) ← (r) (m)
ANDs the general register contents with data memory contents and stores the result in general register.
<3> Example 1
ANDs the address 0.03H (1010B) contents and the address 0.2FH (0110B) contents. Stores the result
(0010B) in address 0.03H:
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) (0.2FH)
1
0
1
0
Address 03H
AND
0
0
1
1
0
0
Address 2FH
Address 03H
0
1
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV MEM003, #1010B
MOV MEM02F, #0110B
AND MEM003, MEM02F
213
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(4) AND m, #n4
<1> OP code
AND between data memory and immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
10100
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) ← (m) n4
ANDs the data memory contents and immediate data. Stores the result in data memory.
<3> Example 1
To reset bit 3 (MSB) for address 0.03H.
(0.03H) ← (0.03H) 0111B
Address 0.03H
1
×
×
×
× : don't care
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
AND MEM003, #0111B
Example 2
To reset all the bits for address 0.03H:
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
AND
MEM003, #0000B
or,
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MOV MEM003, #00H
(5) XOR r, m
<1> OP code
Exclusive OR between general register and data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
00101
mR
mC
r
214
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<2> Function
(r) ← (r) (m)
Exclusive-ORs (XOR) the general register contents with data memory contents. Stores the result in general
register.
<3> Example 1
Compares the address 0.03H contents and the address 0.0FH contents. If different bits are found, set and
store them in address 0.03H. If all the bits in address 0.03H are reset (i.e., the address 0.03H contents are
the same as those for address 0.0FH), jumps to LBL1; otherwise, jumps to LBL2.
This example is to compare the status of an alternate switch (address 0.03H contents) with the internal status
(address 0.0FH contents) and to branch to changed switch processing.
1
0
1
0
Address 03H
XOR
0
1
1
1
0
0
Address 0FH
Address 03H
1
0
Bits changed
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
XOR
MEM003, MEM00F
SKNE MEM003, #00H
BR
BR
LBL1
LBL2
Example 2
Clears the address 0.03H contents:
0
1
0
1
Address 03H
XOR
0
0
1
0
1
0
Address 03H
Address 03H
0
0
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
XOR MEM003, MEM003
215
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(6) XOR m, #n4
<1> OP code
Exclusive OR between data memory and immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
10101
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) ← (m) n4
Exclusive-ORs the data memory contents and immediate data. Stores the result in data memory.
<3> Example
Inverts bits 1 and 3 in address 0.03H and store the result in address 03H:
1
1
0
0
Address 03H
XOR
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Address 03H
Inverted bits
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
XOR
18.5.4 Judgment Instruction
(1) SKT m, #n
MEM003, #1010B
Skip next instruction if data memory bits are true
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
11110
mR
mC
n
<2> Function
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=n, then skip
Skip the next one instruction, if the result of ANDing the data memory contents and immediate data n is
equal to n (Executes as NOP instruction)
216
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
Jumps to AAA, if bit 0 in address 03H is 1; if it is 0, jumps to BBB:
SKT
BR
03H, #0001B
BBB
BR
AAA
Example 2
Skips the next instruction, if both bits 0 and 1 in address 03H are 1.
SKT 03H, #0011B
b3 b2 b1 b0
Skip condition 03H
×
×
1
1
× : don't care
Example 3
The results of executing the following two instructions are the same:
SKT
SKE
13H, #1111B
13H, #0FH
(2) SKF m, #n
<1> OP code
Skip next instruction if data memory bits are false
10
8 7
4 3
0
11111
mR
mC
n
<2> Function
CMP ← 0, if (m) n=0, then skip
Skips the next one instruction, if the result of ANDing the data memory contents and immediate data n is
0 (Executes as NOP instruction).
<3> Example 1
Stores immediate data 00H to address 0FH in the data memory content, if bit 2 in address 13H is 0; if it is
1, jumps to ABC:
MEM013 MEM 0.13H
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
SKF
BR
MEM013, #0100B
ABC
MOV MEM00F, #00H
217
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Example 2
Skips the next instruction, if both bits 3 and 0 in address 29H are 0.
SKF
29H, #1001B
b3 b2 b1 b0
Skip condition
29H
0
×
×
0
× : don't care
Example 3
The results of executing the following two instructions are the same:
SKF
SKE
34H, #1111B
34H, #00H
18.5.5 Comparison Instructions
(1) SKE m, #n4
Skip if data memory equal to immediate data
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
01001
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) –n4, skip if zero
Skip the next one instruction, if the data memory contents are equal to the immediate data value (Executes
as NOP instruction).
<3> Example
To transfer 0FH to address 24H, if the address 24H contents are 0; if not, jumps to OPE1:
MEM024 MEM 0.24H
SKE
BR
MEM024, #00H
OPE1
MOV MEM024, #0FH
:
OPE1
218
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(2) SKNE m, #n4
<1> OP code
Skip if data memory not equal to immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
01011
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) –n4, skip if not zero
Skips the next one instruction, if the data memory contents are not equal to the immediate data value
(Executes as NOP instruction).
<3> Example
Jumps to XYZ, if the address 1FH contents are 1 and the address 1EH contents are 3; otherwise, jumps to
ABC.
To compare 8-bit data, this instruction is used in the following combination:
3
1
1EH
0 0 1 1
1FH
0 0 0 1
MEM01E MEM 0.1EH
MEM01F MEM 0.1FH
SKNE MEM01F, #01H
SKE
BR
MEM01E, #03H
ABC
XYZ
BR
The above program can be rewritten as follows, using compare and zero flags:
MEM01E MEM 0.1EH
MEM01F MEM 0.1FH
SET2 CMP, Z
; CMP flag ← 1, Z flag ← 1
SUB
MEM01F, #01H
SUBC MEM01E, #03H
SKT1
BR
Z
ABC
XYZ
BR
219
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(3) SKGE m, #n4
<1> OP code
Skip if data memory greater than or equal to immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
11001
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) –n4, skip if not borrow
Skips the next one instruction, if the data memory contents are equal to or greater than the immediate data
value (Executes as NOP instruction).
<3> Example
Executes RET, if 8-bit data stored in addresses 1FH (higher) and 2FH (lower) is greater than immediate data
'17H'; if not, executes RETSK:
MEM01E MEM 0.1FH
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
SKGE MEM01F, #1
RETSK
SKNE MEM01F, #1
SKLT MEM02F, #8
; 7+1
RET
RETSK
(4) SKLT m, #n4
<1> OP code
Skip if data memory less than immediate data
10
8 7
4 3
0
11011
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) –n4, skip if borrow
Skips the next one instruction, if the data memory contents are less than the immediate data value (Executes
as NOP instruction).
<3> Example
Stores 01H in address 0FH, if the address 10H contents are greater than immediate data '6'; if not, stores
02H in address 0FH:
220
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MEM010 MEM 0.10H
MOV MEM00F, #02H
SKLT MEM010, #06H
MOV MEM00F, #01H
18.5.6 Rotation Instructions
(1) RORC r
<1> OP code
Rotate right general register with carry flag
3
0
00111
<2> Function
000
0111
r
CY
(r)b3
(r)b2
(r)b1
(r)b0
Rotates the contents of general register indicated by r including carry flag to the right by 1 bit.
<3> Example 1
When row address 0 of bank 0 (0.00H-0.0FH) is specified as general register (RPH=0, RPL=0), rotate the
value of address 0.00H (1000B) to the right by 1 bit to make it 0100B.
(0.00H) ← (0.00H)÷2
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
CLR1 CY
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; CY flag ← 0
RORC MEM000
Example 2
When row address 0 of bank 0 (0.00H-0.0FH) is specified as general register (RPH=0, RPL=0), rotate the
data buffer DBF contents 0FA52H to the right by 1 bit to make DBF contents 7D29H.
221
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
CY
0
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
CY
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
MEM00C MEM 0.0CH
MEM00D MEM 0.0DH
MEM00E MEM 0.0EH
MEM00F MEM 0.0FH
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
CLR1 CY
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; CY flag ← 0
RORC MEM00C
RORC MEM00D
RORC MEM00E
RORC MEM00F
18.5.7 Transfer Instructions
(1) LD r, m
<1> OP code
10
Load data memory to general register
8 7
4 3
0
01000
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
(r) ← (m)
Stores the data memory contents to general register.
<3> Example 1
To store the address 0.2FH contents to address 0.03H:
(0.03H) ← (0.2FH)
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
LD
MEM003, MEM02F
222
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
Example 2
Stores the address 0.6FH contents to address 0.03H. At this time, data memory address 0.6FH can be
specified by selecting data memory address 2FH, if IXE=1, IXH=0, IXM=4, and IXL=0, i.e., IX=0.40H.
IXH ← 00H
IXM ← 04H
IXL ← 00H
IXE flag ← 1
(0.03H) ← (0.6FH)
Address obtained as result of ORing index register contents, 040H,
and data memory contents, 0.2FH
MEM003 MEM 0.03H
MEM02F MEM 0.2FH
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #04H
MOV IXL, #00H
SET1 IXE
; IX ← 00001000000B (0.40H)
; IXE flag ← 1
LD
MEM003, MEM02F
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
223
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(2) ST m, r
<1> OP code
Store general register to data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
11000
mR
mC
r
<2> Function
(m) ← (r)
Stores the general register contents to data memory.
<3> Example 1
Stores the address 0.03H contents to address 0.2FH:
(0.2FH) ← (0.03H)
ST
2FH, 03H
; Transfer general register contents to data memory
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
Example 2
Stores the address 0.00H contents to addresses 0.18H through 0.1FH. The data memory addresses (18H-
1FH) are specified by the index register.
(0.18H) ← (0.00H)
(0.19H) ← (0.00H)
(0.1FH) ← (0.00H)
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #00H
MOV IXL, #00H
; IX ← 00000000000B (0.00H)
; Specifies data memory address 0.00H
224
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
MEM018 MEM 0.18H
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
LOOP1:
SET1 IXE
; IXE flag ← 1
ST
CLR1 IXE
INC IX
SKGE IXL, #08H
MEM018, MEM000 ; (0.1×H) ← (0.00H)
; IXE flag ← 0
; IX ← IX+1
BR
LOOP1
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
(3) MOV @r, m
<1> OP code
Move data memory to destination indirect
10
8 7
4 3
0
01010
<2> Function
mR
mC
r
When MPE=1
(MP, (r)) ← (m)
When MPE=0
(BANK, mR, (r)) ← (m)
Stores the data memory contents to the data memory addressed by the general register contents.
When MPE=0, transfer is performed in the same row address in the same bank.
225
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
Stores the address 0.20H contents to address 0.2FH with the MPE flag cleared to 0. The transfer destination
data memory address is at the same row address as the transfer source, and the column address is specified
by the general register contents at address 0.00H.
(0.2FH) ← (0.20H)
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM020 MEM 0.20H
CLR1 MPE
; MPE flag ← 0
MOV MEM000, #0FH
; Sets column address in general register
MOV @MEM000, MEM020 ; Store
Bank 0
Column address
0
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
Example 2
Stores the address 0.20H contents to address 0.3FH, with the MPE flag set to 1. The row address for the
transfer destination data memory address is specified by the memory pointer MP contents. The column
address is specified by the general register contents at address 0.00H.
(0.3FH) ← (0.20H)
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM020 MEM 0.20H
MOV RPH, #00H
MOV RPL, #00H
MOV 00H, #0FH
MOV MPH, #00H
MOV MPL, #03H
SET1 MPE
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 0
; Sets column address in general register
; Sets row address in memory pointer
;
; MPE flag ← 1
MOV @MEM000, MEM020 ; Store
226
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Bank 0
Column address
0
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
(4) MOV m, @r
<1> OP code
Move data memory to destination indirect
10
8 7
4 3
0
11010
<2> Function
mR
mC
r
When MPE=1
(m) ← (MP, (r))
When MPE=0
(m) ← (BANK, mR, (r))
Stores the data memory contents addressed by the general register contents to data memory.
When MPE=0, transfer is performed in the same row address in the same bank.
<3> Example 1
Stores the address 0.2FH contents to address 0.20H, with the MPE falg cleared to 0. The transfer destination
data memory address is at the same row address as the transfer source. The column address is specified
by the general register contents at address 0.00H.
(0.20H) ← (0.2FH)
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM020 MEM 0.20H
CLR1 MPE
; MPE flag ← 0
MOV MEM000, #0FH
; Sets column address in general register
MOV MEM020, @MEM000 ; Store
227
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Bank 0
Column address
0
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
Example 2
Stores the address 0.3FH contents to address 0.20H, with the MPE flag set to 1. The row address for the
transfer source data memory is specified by the memory pointer MP contents. The column address is
specified by the general register contents at address 0.00H.
(0.20H) ← (0.3FH)
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MEM020 MEM 0.20H
MOV MEM000, #0FH
MOV MPH, #00H
MOV MPL, #03H
SET1 MPE
; Sets column address in general register
; Sets row address in memory pointer
;
; MPE flag ← 1
MOV MEM020, @MEM000 ; Store
Bank 0
Column address
0
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
General register
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
228
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(5) MOV m, #n4
<1> OP code
Move immediate data to data memory
10
8 7
4 3
0
11101
mR
mC
n4
<2> Function
(m) ← n4
Stores immediate data to data memory.
<3> Example 1
Stores immediate data 0AH to data memory address 0.50H:
(0.50H) ← 0AH
MEM050 MEM 0.50H
MOV MEM050, #0AH
Example 2
Stores immediate data 07H to address 0.32H, when data memory address 0.00H is specified with IXH=0,
IXM=3, IXL=2, and IXE flag=1:
(0.32H) ← 07H
MEM000 MEM 0.00H
MOV IXH, #00H
MOV IXM, #03H
MOV IXL, #02H
SET1 IXE
; IX ← 00000110010B (0.32H)
; IXE flag ← 1
MOV MEM000, #07H
(6) MOVT DBF, @AR
<1> OP code
Move program memory data specified by AR to DBF
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
000
0001
0000
<2> Function
SP ← SP–1, ASR ← PC, PC ← AR,
DBF ← (PC), PC ← ASR, SP ← SP+1
229
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Stores the program memory contents, addressed by address register AR, to data buffer DBF.
Since this instruction temporarily uses one stack level, pay attention to nesting such as subroutines and
interrupts.
<3> Example
To transfer 16 bits of table data, specified by the values for address registers AR3, AR2, AR1, and AR0 in
the system register, to data buffers DBF3, DBF2, DBF1, and DBF0:
; *
; ** Table data
; *
Address
0010H
0011H
ORG 0010H
DW
DW
0000000000000000B ; (0000H)
1010101111001101B ; (0ABCDH)
; *
; ** Table reference program
; *
MOV AR3, #00H
MOV AR2, #00H
MOV AR1, #01H
MOV AR0, #01H
MOVT DBF, @AR
; AR3 ← 00H
; AR2 ← 00H
; AR1 ← 01H
; AR0 ← 01H
Sets 0011H in address register
; Transfers address 0011H data to DBF
In this case, the data are stored in DBF, as follows:
DBF3=0AH
DBF2=0BH
DBF1=0CH
DBF0=0DH
(7) PUSH AR
<1> OP code
Push address register
00111
000
1101
0000
230
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<2> Function
SP ← SP–1,
ASR ← AR
Decrements stack pointer SP and stores the address register AR value to address stack register specified
by stack pointer.
<3> Example 1
Sets 003FH in address register and stores it in stack:
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
PUSH
AR3, #00H
AR2, #00H
AR1, #03H
AR0, #0FH
AR
Bank 0
Column address
6 7
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
T
A
C
K
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
3
F
0
0
3
F
System register
231
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Example 2
Sets the return address for a subroutine in the address register. Returns execution, if a data table exists
after a subroutine:
Address
0010H CALL
;*
SUB1
SUB1:
;** DATA TABLE
;*
0011H DW
0012H DW
0013H DW
0014H DW
1A1FH
002FH
010AH
0555FH
POP
AR
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
PUSH
RET
AR3, #00H
AR2, #00H
AR1, #03H
AR0, #00H
AR
002FH DW
0030H
0FFFH
If POP instruction is executed at
this time, the contents of address
register is "0011H" (the next address
of CALL instruction).
232
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(8) POP AR
<1> OP code
Pop address register
00111
000
1100
0000
<2> Function
AR ← ASR,
SP ← SP+1
Pops the contents of address stack register indicated by stack pointer to address register AR and then
increments stack pointer SP.
<3> Example
If the PSW contents are changed, while an interrupt processing routine is being executed, the PSW contents
are transferred to the address register through WR at the beginning of the interrupt processing and saved
to address stack register by the PUSH instruction. Before the execution returns from the interrupt routine,
the address register contents are restored through WR to PSW by the POP instruction.
Interrupt processing routine
PEEK
POKE
PUSH
WR, PSW
AR0, WR
AR
EI
Genetates
interrupt factor
POP
AR
PEEK
POKE
WR, AR0
PSW, WR
RET (or RETI)
233
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(9) PEEK WR, rf
<1> OP code
Peek register file to window register
00111
rfR
0011
rfC
<2> Function
WR ← (rf)
Stores the register file contents to window register WR.
<3> Example
Stores the stack pointer SP contents at address 01H in the register file to the window register:
PEEK WR, SP
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
WR
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
SP
Register file
234
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(10) POKE rf, WR
<1> OP code
Poke window register to register file
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
rfR
0010
rfC
<2> Function
(rf) ← WR
Stores the window register WR contents to register file.
<3> Example 1
Stores immediate data 0FH to P0DBIO for the register file through the window register:
MOV
WR, #0FH
POKE
P0DBIO, WR
; Sets all of P0D0, P0D1, P0D2, and P0D3 in output mode
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
WR
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
Register file
P0DBIO
235
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<4> Note
Among register files, data memories can be seen at 40H-7FH (74H-7FH is system register). Therefore, the
PEEK and POKE instructions can access addresses 40H through 7FH in each data memory bank, in addition
to the register file. For example, these instructions can be used as follows:
MEM05F MEM 0.5FH
PEEK WR, PSW
; Stores PSW (7FH) contents in system register to WR
; Stores WR contents to address 5FH in data memory
POKE MEM05F, WR
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Register file
POKE
PEEK
5FH, WR
WR, PSW
Data memory
PSW
WR
System register
(11) GET DBF, p
<1> OP code
Get peripheral data to data buffer
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
PH
1011
PL
<2> Function
DBF ← (p)
Stores the peripheral register contents to data buffer DBF.
<3> Example 1
Stores the 8-bit contents for shift register SIOSFR in the serial interface to data buffers DBF0 and DBF1:
GET DBF, SIOSFR
236
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
1
F
2
DBF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Peripheral
circit
12H
SIOSFR
System register
<4> Note 1
The data buffer is assigned to addresses 0CH, 0DH, 0EH, and 0FH in bank 0 for the data memory, regardless
of the bank register value.
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
DBF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
System register
Note 2
Up to 16 bits in the data buffer are available. When a peripheral circuit is accessed by the GET instruction,
the number of bits, by which the circuit is to be accessed, differs depending on the circuit. For example,
if the GET instruction is executed to access a peripheral circuit, which should be accessed in 8-bit units, data
is stored in the lower 8 bits for the data buffer DBF (DBF1, DBF0).
DBF3
Retain
DBF2
Retain
DBF1
DBF0
Data buffer
b7
b
0
GET
Data of peripheral
hardware
Actual bits
b7
b0
237
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(12) PUT p, DBF
<1> OP code
Put data buffer to peripheral
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
PH
1010
PL
<2> Function
(p) ← DBF
Stores the data buffer DBF contents to peripheral register.
<3> Example
Sets 0AH and 05H to data buffers DBF1 and DBF0, respectively, and transfers them to a peripheral register,
shift register (SIOSFR) for serial interface:
MOV
MOV
MOV
PUT
BANK,
DBF0,
DBF1,
SIOSFR
DBF
#00H
#05H
#0AH
; Data memory bank 0
Bank 0
Column address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
A
F
5
DBF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Peripheral
circit
0A5H
SIOSFR
System register
<4> Note
Up to 16 bits in the data buffer are available. When a peripheral circuit is accessed by the PUT instruction,
the number of bits, by which the circuit is to be accessed, differs depending on the circuit. For example,
if the PUT instruction is executed to access the shift register SIO, which should be accessed in 8-bits units,
only the lower 8 bits for the data buffer DBF (DBF1, DBF0) are transferred (DBF3 and DBF2 are not
transferred).
238
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
DBF3
Don't care
DBF2
Don't care
DBF1
DBF0
Data buffer
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
PUT
Actual bits
Data of peripheral
hardware
b7
b0
18.5.8 Branch Instructions
(1) BR addr
Branch to the address
<1> OP code
10
0
01100
addr
<2> Function
PC ← addr
Branches to an address specified by addr.
<3> Example
FLY
LAB
0FH
; Defines FLY=0FH
:
:
BR
FLY
; Jumps to address 0FH
; Jumps to LOOP1
:
:
BR
LOOP1
$+2
:
:
BR
; Jumps to an address 2 addresses lower than current address
; Jumps to an address 3 addresses higher than current address
:
:
BR
$–3
:
:
LOOP1:
239
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(2) BR @AR
<1> OP code
Branch to the address specified by address register
00111
000
0100
0000
<2> Function
PC ← AR
Branches to the program address, specified by address register AR.
<3> Example 1
Sets 003FH in address register AR (AR0-AR3) and jumps to address 003FH by using the BR @AR instruction:
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
BR
AR3, #00H ; AR3 ← 00H
AR2, #00H ; AR2 ← 00H
AR1, #03H ; AR1 ← 03H
AR0, #0FH ; AR0 ← 0FH
@AR
; Jumps to address 003FH
Example 2
Changes the branch destination according to the data memory address 0.10H contents, as follows:
0.10H contents
Branch destination label
00H
01H
→
AAA
BBB
CCC
DDD
EEE
FFF
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
02H
03H
04H
05H
06H
GGG
HHH
ZZZ
07H
08H-0FH
; *
; ** Jump table
; *
Address
0010H
0011H
0012H
BR
BR
BR
AAA
BBB
CCC
240
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
0013H
0014H
0015H
0016H
0017H
0018H
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
DDD
EEE
FFF
GGG
HHH
ZZZ
:
:
:
MEM010 MEM
0.10H
RPH,
RPL,
AR3,
AR2,
AR1,
AR0,
AR0,
AR0,
@AR
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
ST
#00H
#02H
#00H
#00H
#01H
; General register bank 0
; General register row address 1
; AR3 ← 00H Sets AR to 001×H
; AR2 ← 00H
; AR1 ← 01H
#MEM010 ; AR0 ← 0.10H
SKF
#1000B
#1000B
; Sets 08H in AR0, if AR0 contents are greater than 08H
AND
BR
;
<4> Note
The higher 6 bits of address register are fixed to 0. Only lower 10 bits can be used.
18.5.9 Subroutine Instructions
(1) CALL addr
Call subroutine
<1> OP code
10
0
11100
<2> Function
addr
SP ← SP–1, ASR ← PC,
PC ← addr
241
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
Increments the program counter PC value, stores it to stack, and branches to a subroutine specified by addr.
<3> Example 1
MAIN
SUB:
CALL
SUB1
RET
Example 2
MAIN
CALL
SUB1:
SUB2:
SUB3:
SUB1
CALL SUB2
RET
CALL SUB3
RET
RET
(2) CALL @AR
<1> OP code
Call subroutine specified by address register
00111
000
0101
0000
<2> Function
SP ← SP–1,
ASR ← PC,
PC ← AR
Increments and saves to the stack the program counter PC value, and branches to a subroutine that starts
from the address specified by address register AR.
242
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example 1
Sets 0020H in address register AR (AR0-AR3) and calls the subroutine at address 0020H with the CALL @AR
instruction:
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
CALL
AR3, #00H ; AR3 ← 00H
AR2, #00H ; AR2 ← 00H
AR1, #02H ; AR1 ← 02H
AR0, #00H ; AR0 ← 00H
@AR
; Calls subroutine at address 0020H
Example 2
Calls the following subroutine by the data memory address 0.10H contents:
0.10H Contents
Subroutine
SUB1
SUB2
SUB3
SUB4
SUB5
SUB6
SUB7
SUB8
SUB9
00H
01H
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
02H
03H
04H
05H
06H
07H
08H-0FH
243
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
;*
;**Jump table for subroutine
;*
Address
0010H
0011H
0012H
0013H
0014H
0015H
0016H
0017H
0018H
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
BR
SUB1
SUB2
SUB3
SUB4
SUB5
SUB6
SUB7
SUB8
SUB9
SUB1:
SUB2:
SUB3:
RET
RET
RET
SUB4:
SUB5:
SUB6:
SUB7:
SUB8:
SUB9:
SET
RET
RET
RET
RET
RET
MOV
RPH,
#00H
#02H
#00H
#00H
#01H
10H
; General register bank 0
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
ST
RPL,
AR3,
AR2,
AR1,
AR0,
AR0,
AR0,
; General register row address 1
; AR3 00H address register 001× H
; AR2 00H
; AR1 01H
; AR0 0.10H
SKF
#1000B ; If the content of AR0 is larger than 08H,
#1000B ; set AR0 content to 08H
To jump table
AND
CALL
@AR,
Returns here when executing
RET instruction in each subroutine
<4> Note
The higher 6 bits of address register are fixed to 0. Only lower 10 bits can be used.
244
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
(3) RET
Return to the main program from subroutine
<1> OP code
10
8 7
4 3
0
00111
000
1110
0000
<2> Function
PC ← ASR,
SP ← SP+1
Instruction to return to the main program from a subroutine.
Restores the return address, saved to the stack by the CALL instruction, to the program counter.
<3> Example
SUB1
CALL
SUB1
RET
(4) RETSK
Return to the main program then skip next instruction
<1> OP code
00111
001
1110
0000
<2> Function
PC ← ASR, SP ← SP+1 and skip
Instruction to return to the main program from a subroutine.
Skips the instruction next to the CALL instruction (Executes as NOP instruction).
Therefore, restores the return address, saved to the stack by the CALL instruction, to program counter PC
and then increments the program counter.
245
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
<3> Example
Executes the RET instruction, if the LSB (least significant bit) content for address 25H in the data memory
(RAM) is 0. The execution is returned to the instruction next to the CALL instruction. If the LSB is 1, executes
the RETSK instruction. The execution is returned to the instruction following the one next to the CALL
instruction (in this example, ADD 03H, 16H).
SUB1
CALL
BR
SUB1
LOOP
SKF
25H, #0001B
; LSB of 25H is "1"
; LSB of 25H is "0"
ADD
03H, 16H
RETSK
RET
(5) RETI
Return to the main program from interrupt service routine
<1> OP code
00111
100
1110
0000
<2> Function
PC ← ASR, INTR ← INTSK, SP ← SP+1
Instruction to return to the main program, from an interrupt service program.
Restores the return address, saved to the stack by a vector interrupt, to the program counter.
Part of the system register is also returned to the status before the occurrence of the vector interrupt.
<3> Note 1
The system register contents that are automatically saved (i.e., that can be restored by the RETI instruction)
when an interrupt occurs is PSWORD.
Note 2
If the RETI instruction is used, instead of the RET instruction, in an ordinary subroutine, the contents of the
bank (which are to be saved when an interrupt occurs) are changed to the contents of the interrupt stack,
when the execution has returned to the return address. Consequently, an unpredictable status may be
assumed. Therefore, use the RET (or RETSK) instruction to return from a subroutine.
246
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.5.10 Interrupt Instructions
(1) EI
Enable Interrupt
<1> OP code
00111
000
1111
0000
<2> Function
INTEF ← 1
Enables a vectored interrupt.
The interrupt is enabled, after the instruction next to the EI instruction has been executed.
<3> Example 1
As shown in the following example, the interrupt request is accepted after the instruction next to that, that
has accepted the interrupt, has been completely executed (excluding an instruction that manipulates program
counter). The flow then shifts to the vector addressNote1
.
Note 2
Interrupt service
EI
Routine (vecter address)
Generating
interrupt request
MOV
ADD
ADD
0AH, #00H
0BH, #01H
0CH, #01H
EI
RET
DI
Generating
interrupt request
EI
MOV
SUB
0AH, #01H
0BH, #01H
Notes 1. The vector address differs, depending on the interrupt to be accepted. Refer to Table 14-
1 Interrupt Source Types.
247
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
2. The interrupt accepted in this example (an interrupt request is generated after the EI
instruction has been executed and the execution flow shifts to an interrupt service
routine) is the interrupt, whose interrupt enable flag (IP×××) is set. The interrupt request
generation without the interrupt enable flag set does not change the program flow, after
the EI instruction has been executed (therefore, the interrupt is not accepted). However,
interrupt request flag (IRQ×××) is set, and the interrupt is accepted, as soon as the interrupt
enable flag is set.
Example 2
An example of an interrupt, which occurs in response to an interrupt request being accepted when program
counter PC is being executed:
Interrupt service
EI
routine (vecter address)
Generating
BR
ABC
interrupt request
EI
RET
ABC:
MOV
ADD
0AH, #00H
0BH, #01H
(2) DI
<1> OP code
00111
Disable interrupt
001
1111
0000
<2> Function
INTEF ← 0
Instruction to disable a vectored interrupt.
<3> Example
Refer to Example 1 in (1) EI.
248
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION SET
18.5.11 Other Instructions
(1) STOP s
Stop CPU and release by condition s
<1> OP code
3
0
00111
010
1111
s
<2> Function
Stops the system clock and places the device in the STOP mode.
In the STOP mode, the power dissipation for the device is minimized.
The condition, under which the STOP mode is to be released, is specified by operand (s).
For the stop releasing condition (s), refer to 15.3.
(2) HALT h
<1> OP code
Halt CPU and release by condition h
3
0
00111
011
1111
h
<2> Function
Places the device in the halt mode.
In the halt mode, the power dissipation for the device is reduced.
The condition, under which the halt mode is to be released, is specified by operand (h).
For halt releasing condition (h), refer to 15.2 HALT MODE.
(3) NOP
<1> OP code
00111
No operation
100
1111
0000
<2> Function
Performs nothing and consumes one machine cycle.
249
[MEMO]
250
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
19.1 MASK OPTION PSEUDO INSTRUCTIONS
To create µPD17120, 17121, 17132, and 17133 programs, it is necessary to specify whether pins that can have
pull-up resistors have pull-up resistors. This is done in the assembler source program using mask option pseudo
instructions. To set the mask option, note that D171××.OPT file in the AS171×× (µPD171×× device file) must be in
the current directory at assembly time.
Specify mask options for the following pins:
• RESET pin
• Port 0D (P0D3, P0D2, P0D1, P0D0)
• Port 0E (P0E1, P0E0)
19.1.1 OPTION and ENDOP Pseudo Instructions
The block from the OPTION pseudo instruction to the ENDOP pseudo instruction is defined as the option definition
block.
The format for the mask option definition block is shown below. Only the three pseudo instructions listed in Table
19-1 can be described in this block.
Format:
Symbol
[label:]
Mnemonic
Operand
Comment
OPTION
[;comment]
•
•
•
•
ENDOP
251
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
19.1.2 Mask Option Definition Pseudo Instructions
Table 19-1 lists the pseudo instructions which define the mask options for each pin.
Table 19-1. Mask Option Definition Pseudo Instructions
Mask Option
Pin
Number of Operands
1
Parameter Name
Pseudo Instruction
RESET
OPTRES
OPEN
(without pull-up resistor)
PULLUP (with pull-up resistor)
OPEN (without pull-up resistor)
PULLUP (with pull-up resistor)
OPEN (without pull-up resistor)
PULLUP (with pull-up resistor)
P0D3-P0D0
P0E1, P0E0
OPTP0D
OPTP0E
4
2
The OPTRES format is shown below. Specify the RESET mask option in the operand field.
Symbol
[label:]
Mnemonic
OPTRES
Operand
(RESET)
Comment
[;comment]
The OPTP0D format is shown below. Specify mask options for all pins of port 0D. Specify the pins in the operand
field starting at the first operand in the order P0D3, P0D2, P0D1, then P0D0.
Symbol
[label:]
Mnemonic
OPTP0D
Operand
Comment
(P0D3), (P0D2), (P0D1), (P0D0)
[;comment]
The OPTP0E is shown below. Specify mask options for all pins of port 0E. Specify the pins in the operand field
starting at the first operand in the order P0E1, P0E0.
Symbol
[label:]
Mnemonic
OPTP0E
Operand
Comment
(P0E1), (P0E0)
[;comment]
252
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Example of describing mask options
RESET pin: Pull-up
P0D3: Open, P0D2: Open, P0D1: Pull-up, P0D0: Pull-up,
P0E1: Pull-up, P0E0: Open
Symbol
;µPD17133
Mnemonic
OPTION
Operand
Comment
Setting mask options:
;
OPTRES
OPTP0D
OPTP0E
PULLUP
OPEN, OPEN, PULLUP, PULLUP
PULLUP, OPEN
;
ENDOP
253
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
19.2 RESERVED SYMBOLS
The reserved symbols defined in the µPD17120 subseries device file (AS1712×, AS1713×) are listed below.
19.2.1 List of Reserved Symbols (µPD17120, 17121)
System register (SYSREG)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.74H
Read/Write
R
Description
Bits 15 to 12 of the address register
Bits 11 to 8 of the address register
Bits 7 to 4 of the address register
Bits 3 to 0 of the address register
Window register
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
WR
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
FLG
0.75H
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0.76H
0.77H
0.78H
BANK
IXH
0.79H
Bank register
0.7AH
0.7AH
0.7AH.3
0.7BH
0.7BH
0.7CH
0.7DH
0.7EH
0.7FH
Index register high
MPH
MPE
IXM
MPL
IXL
Data memory row address pointer high
Memory pointer enable flag
Index register middle
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
FLG
Data memory row address pointer low
Index register low
RPH
RPL
PSW
BCD
CMP
CY
General register pointer high
General register pointer low
Program status word
0.7EH.0
0.7FH.3
0.7FH.2
0.7FH.1
0.7FH.0
BCD flag
FLG
Compare flag
FLG
Carry flag
Z
FLG
Zero flag
IXE
FLG
Index enable flag
Data buffer (DBF)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.0CH
0.0DH
0.0EH
0.0FH
Read/Write
R/W
Description
DBF bits 15 to 12
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
R/W
DBF bits 11 to 8
R/W
DBF bits 7 to 4
R/W
DBF bits 3 to 0
254
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Port register
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.6FH.1
Read/Write
R/W
Description
P0E1
FLG
Port 0E bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0E0
FLG
0.6FH.0
R/W
Port 0E bit 0
P0A3
FLG
0.70H.3
R/W
Port 0A bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A2
FLG
0.70H.2
R/W
Port 0A bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A1 FLG 0.70H.1 R/W Port 0A bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A0
P0B3
FLG
FLG
0.70H.0
0.71H.3
R/W
R/W
Port 0A bit 0
Port 0B bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B2
FLG
0.71H.2
R/W
Port 0B bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B1 FLG 0.71H.1 R/W Port 0B bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B0
FLG
0.71H.0
R/W
Port 0B bit 0
P0C3
FLG
0.72H.3
R/W
Port 0C bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C2
FLG
0.72H.2
R/W
Port 0C bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C1 FLG 0.72H.1 R/W Port 0C bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C0
FLG
0.72H.0
R/W
Port 0C bit 0
P0D3
FLG
0.73H.3
R/W
Port 0D bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D2
FLG
0.73H.2
R/W
Port 0D bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D1 FLG 0.73H.1 R/W Port 0D bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D0
FLG
0.73H.0
R/W
Port 0D bit 0
Register file (control register)
Symbol Name Attribute Value
(1/2)
Read/Write
R/W
Description
SP
MEM
FLG
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.81H
Stack pointer
SIOEN
INT
0.8AH.0
0.8FH.0
0.90H.0
0.91H.3
R/W
SIO enable flag
INT pin status flag
R
PDRESEN
TMEN
R/W
Power-down reset enable flag
Timer enable flag
R/W
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMRES
FLG
0.91H.2
R/W
Timer reset flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMCK1 FLG 0.91H.1 R/W Timer count pulse selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMCK0
TMOSEL
SIOTS
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.91H.0
0.92H.0
0.9AH.3
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer count pulse selection flag bit 0
Timer output port/port selection flag
SIO start flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOHIZ
FLG
0.9AH.2
R/W
SO pin status
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOCK1 FLG 0.9AH.1 R/W Serial clock selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOCK0 FLG 0.9AH.0 R/W Serial clock selection flag bit 0
255
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Register file (control register)
(2/2)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.9FH.1
Read/Write
R/W
Description
INT pin edge detection selection flag bit 1
IEGMD1
FLG
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IEGMD0
FLG
0.9FH.0
R/W
INT pin edge detection selection flag bit 0
P0BGIO
FLG
0.A4H.0
R/W
P0B group input/output selection flag (1= all P0Bs are
output ports.)
IPSIO
FLG
0.AFH.2
R/W
SIO interrupt flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IPTM
FLG
0.AFH.1
R/W
Timer interrupt enable flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
FLG
FLG
0.AFH.0
0.B2H.1
R/W
R/W
INT pin interrupt enable flag
P0EBIO1
P0E1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0EBIO0
FLG
0.B2H.0
R/W
P0E0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0DBIO3
FLG
0.B3H.3
R/W
P0D3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO2
FLG
0.B3H.2
R/W
P0D2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO1 FLG 0.B3H.1 R/W P0D1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO0
FLG
0.B3H.0
R/W
P0D0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0C3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0CBIO3
FLG
0.B4H.3
R/W
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO2
FLG
0.B4H.2
R/W
P0C2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO1 FLG 0.B4H.1 R/W P0C1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO0
P0ABIO3
FLG
FLG
0.B4H.0
0.B5H.3
R/W
R/W
P0C0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0A3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO2
FLG
0.B5H.2
R/W
P0A2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO1 FLG 0.B5H.1 R/W P0A1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO0
IRQSIO
IRQTM
IRQ
FLG
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.B5H.0
0.BDH.0
0.BEH.0
0.BFH.0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P0A0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
SIO interrupt request flag
Timer interrupt request flag
INT pin interrupt request flag
Peripheral hardware register
Symbol Name Attribute Value
Read/Write
Description
SIOSFR
TMC
TMM
AR
DAT
DAT
DAT
DAT
01H
02H
03H
40H
R/W
R
Peripheral address of the shift register
Peripheral address of the timer count register
Peripheral address of the timer modulo register
W
R/W
Peripheral address of the address register for GET, PUT,
PUSH, CALL, BR, MOVT, and INC instructions
256
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Others
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
Description
Fix operand value of PUT, GET, MOVT instructions
Fix operand value of INC instruction
DBF
IX
DAT
DAT
0FH
01H
257
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Figure 19-1. Configuration of Control Register (µPD17120, 17121) (1/2)
Column address
Row
address Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S
P
Symbol
0
0
0
(8)
At reset
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
P
T
T
T
T
M
C
K
T
M
O
S
D M M M
R
E
S
E
N
E
N
R
E
S
C
K
1
Symbol
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
L
1
(9)
At reset
0
1
0
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
P
0
B
G
I
Symbol
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
2
(A)
At reset
0
Read/
Write
R/W
P
P
0
E
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
0
E
B
I
0
0
0
0
Symbol
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
3
(B)
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Remark
(
) means the address when using assembler (AS17K).
All flags of the control register are registered in device file as assembler reserved words. It is convenient
for program design to use the reserved words.
258
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Figure 19-1. Configuration of Control Register (µPD17120, 17121) (2/2)
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
I
O
E
N
I
N
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note
0
R/W
R
S
I
O
T
S
S
I
S
I
O
C
K
1
S
I
O
C
K
0
I
E
G
M M
D
1
I
E
G
O
H
I
0
0
0
0
D
0
Z
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
I
P
S
I
I
I
P
P
T
M
0
0
O
0
0
0
R/W
I
I
I
R
Q
R
Q
S
I
R
Q
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M
O
0
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note The INT flag differs depending on the INT pin state at the time.
259
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
19.2.2 List of Reserved Symbols (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133)
System register (SYSREG)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.74H
Read/Write
R
Description
Address register bits 15 to 12
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
WR
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
FLG
0.75H
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Address register bits 11 to 8
Address register bits 7 to 4
Address register bits 3 to 0
Window register
0.76H
0.77H
0.78H
BANK
IXH
0.79H
Bank register
0.7AH
0.7AH
0.7AH.3
0.7BH
0.7BH
0.7CH
0.7DH
0.7EH
0.7FH
Index register high
MPH
MPE
IXM
MPL
IXL
Data memory row address pointer high
Memory pointer enable flag
Index register middle
Data memory row address pointer low
Index register low
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
FLG
RPH
RPL
PSW
BCD
CMP
CY
General register pointer high
General register pointer low
Program status word
BCD flag
0.7EH.0
0.7FH.3
0.7FH.2
0.7FH.1
0.7FH.0
FLG
Compare flag
FLG
Carry flag
Z
FLG
Zero flag
IXE
FLG
Index enable flag
260
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Data buffer (DBF)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
Read/Write
R/W
Description
DBF3
DBF2
DBF1
DBF0
MEM
MEM
MEM
MEM
0.0CH
0.0DH
0.0EH
0.0FH
DBF bits 15 to 12
DBF bits 11 to 8
DBF bits 7 to 4
DBF bits 3 to 0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Port register
Symbol Name Attribute
P0E1 FLG
Value
Read/Write
R/W
Description
0.6FH.1
Port 0E bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0E0
P0A3
FLG
FLG
0.6FH.0
0.70H.3
R/W
R/W
Port 0E bit 0
Port 0A bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A2
FLG
0.70H.2
R/W
Port 0A bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A1 FLG 0.70H.1 R/W Port 0A bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0A0
FLG
0.70H.0
R/W
Port 0A bit 0
P0B3
FLG
0.71H.3
R/W
Port 0B bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B2
FLG
0.71H.2
R/W
Port 0B bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B1 FLG 0.71H.1 R/W Port 0B bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0B0
FLG
0.71H.0
R/W
Port 0B bit 0
P0C3
FLG
0.72H.3
R/W
Port 0C bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C2
FLG
0.72H.2
R/W
Port 0C bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C1 FLG 0.72H.1 R/W Port 0C bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C0
P0D3
FLG
FLG
0.72H.0
0.73H.3
R/W
R/W
Port 0C bit 0
Port 0D bit 3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D2
FLG
0.73H.2
R/W
Port 0D bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D1 FLG 0.73H.1 R/W Port 0D bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0D0 FLG 0.73H.0 R/W Port 0D bit 0
261
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Register file (control register)
(1/2)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
Read/Write
R/W
Description
SP
MEM
FLG
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.81H
Stack pointer
SIOEN
INT
0.8AH.0
0.8FH.0
0.90H.0
0.91H.3
R
SIO enable flag
R/W
INT pin status flag
Power-down reset enable flag
Timer enable flag
PDRESEN
TMEN
R/W
R/W
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMRES
FLG
0.91H.2
R/W
Timer reset flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMCK1 FLG 0.91H.1 R/W Timer source clock selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
TMCK0
TMOSEL
SIOTS
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.91H.0
0.92H.0
0.9AH.3
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer source clock selection flag bit 0
Timer output port/port selection flag
SIO start flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOHIZ
FLG
0.9AH.2
R/W
SO pin status
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOCK1 FLG 0.9AH.1 R/W SIO source clock selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
SIOCK0
FLG
FLG
0.9AH.0
0.9CH.1
R/W
R/W
SIO source clock selection flag bit 0
CMPCH1
Comparator input channel selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
CMPCH0
FLG
FLG
0.9CH.0
0.9DH.3
R/W
R/W
Comparator input channel selection flag bit 0
Comparator reference voltage selection flag bit 3
CMPVREF3
..................................................................................................................................................................................
CMPVREF2
FLG
0.9DH.2
R/W
Comparator reference voltage selection flag bit 2
..................................................................................................................................................................................
CMPVREF1 FLG 0.9DH.1 R/W Comparator reference voltage selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
CMPVREF0
CMPSTRT
FLG
FLG
0.9DH.0
0.9EH.1
R/W
R
Comparator reference voltage selection flag bit 0
Comparator start flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
CMPRSLT
IEGMD1
FLG
FLG
0.9EH.0
0.9FH.1
R/W
R/W
Comparator comparison result flag
INT pin edge detection selection flag bit 1
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IEGMD0
FLG
0.9FH.0
R/W
INT pin edge detection selection flag bit 0
P0C3IDI
FLG
0.A3H.3
R/W
P0C3 input port disable flag (P0C3/Cin3 selection)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C2IDI
FLG
0.A3H.2
R/W
P0C2 input port disable flag (P0C2/Cin2 selection)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C1IDI FLG 0.A3H.1 R/W P0C1 input port disable flag (P0C1/Cin1 selection)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0C0IDI
FLG
0.A3H.0
R/W
P0C0 input port disable flag (P0C0/Cin0 selection)
P0BGIO
FLG
0.A4H.0
R/W
P0B group input/output selection flag (1= all P0Es are
output ports.)
IPSIO
FLG
0.AFH.2
R/W
SIO interrupt flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IPTM
FLG
0.AFH.1
R/W
Timer interrupt enable flag
..................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
FLG
FLG
0.AFH.0
0.B2H.1
R/W
R/W
INT pin interrupt enable flag
P0EBIO1
P0E1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0EBIO0
FLG
0.B2H.0
R/W
P0E0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0D3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0DBIO3
FLG
0.B3H.3
R/W
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO2
FLG
0.B3H.2
R/W
P0D2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO1 FLG 0.B3H.1 R/W P0D1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0DBIO0 FLG 0.B3H.0 R/W P0D0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
262
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Register file (control register)
(2/2)
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0.B4H.3
Read/Write
R/W
Description
P0C3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0CBIO3
FLG
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO2
FLG
0.B4H.2
R/W
P0C2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO1 FLG 0.B4H.1 R/W P0C1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0CBIO0
P0ABIO3
FLG
FLG
0.B4H.0
0.B5H.3
R/W
R/W
P0C0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
P0A3 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO2
FLG
0.B5H.2
R/W
P0A2 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO1 FLG 0.B5H.1 R/W P0A1 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
..................................................................................................................................................................................
P0ABIO0
IRQSIO
IRQTM
IRQ
FLG
FLG
FLG
FLG
0.B5H.0
0.BDH.0
0.BEH.0
0.BFH.0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P0A0 input/output selection flag (1=output port)
SIO interrupt request flag
Timer interrupt request flag
INT pin interrupt request flag
Peripheral hardware register
Symbol Name Attribute Value
Read/Write
Description
SIOSFR
TMC
TMM
AR
DAT
DAT
DAT
DAT
01H
02H
03H
40H
R/W
R
Peripheral address of the shift register
Peripheral address of the timer count register
Peripheral address of the timer modulo register
W
R/W
Peripheral address of the address register for GET, PUT,
PUSH, CALL, BR, MOVT, and INC instructions
Others
Symbol Name Attribute
Value
0FH
Description
DBF
IX
DAT
DAT
Fix operand value of PUT, GET, MOVT instructions
Fix operand value of INC instruction
01H
263
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Figure 19-2. Configuration of Control Register (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133) (1/2)
Column address
Row
address Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S
P
Symbol
0
0
0
(8)
At reset
1
0
1
T
Read/
Write
R/W
P
T
T
T
T
M
O
S
D M M M M
R
E
S
E
N
E
N
R
E
S
C
K
1
C
K
0
Symbol
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
L
1
(9)
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
P
0
C
3
I
D
I
P
0
C
2
I
D
I
P
0
C
1
I
D
I
P
0
C
0
I
D
I
P
0
B
G
I
Symbol
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
2
(A)
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
P
P
0
E
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
D
B
I
P
P
0
D
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
C
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
P
0
A
B
I
0
E
B
I
0
D
B
I
0
C
B
I
0
0
0
0
Symbol
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
O
3
O
2
O
1
O
0
3
(B)
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Remark
(
) means the address when using assembler (AS17K).
All flags of the control register are registered in device file as assembler reserved words. It is convenient
for program design to use the reserved words.
264
CHAPTER 19 ASSEMBLER RESERVED WORDS
Figure 19-2. Configuration of Control Register (µPD17132, 17133, 17P132, 17P133) (2/2)
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
I
O
E
N
I
N
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
S
I
O
T
S
S
I
S
I
O
C
K
1
S
I
O
C
K
0
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
I
E
G
M M
D
1
I
E
G
M M M M
M M
M M
P
V
R
E
F
3
P
V
R
E
F
2
P
V
R
E
F
1
P
V
R
E
F
0
O
H
I
P
C
H
1
P
C
H
1
P
S
T
R
T
P
R
S
L
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D
0
Z
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
I
P
S
I
I
I
P
P
T
M
0
0
O
0
0
0
R/W
I
I
I
R
Q
R
Q
S
I
R
Q
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M
O
0
0
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note The INT flag differs depending on the INT pin state at the time.
265
[MEMO]
266
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
The following support tools are available for developing programs for the µPD17120 subseries.
Hardware
Name
Outline
In-circuit Emulator
IE-17K
IE-17K-ETNote 1
EMU-17KNote 1
IE-17K, IE-17K-ET, and EMU-17K are the in-circuit emulators common to all
17K-series products.
IE-17K and IE-17K-ET are used by connecting to the host machine PC-9800
series or IBM PC/ATTM through RS-232-C. EMU-17K is used by installing
in the expansion slot of the host machine PC-9800 series.
By using it in combination with the system evaluation board (SE board)
dedicated to the relevant machine type, the emulator can perform opera-
tions compatible with it. An even more advanced debugging environment
can be realized by using SIMPLEHOST, which is man-machine interface
software.
EMU-17K is equipped with the function of checking the contents of the
data memory in a real-time environment.
SE Board
(SE-17120)
The SE-17120 is an SE board for the µPD17120 subseries. The board is
used for evaluation of single system units as well as for debugging by
being combined with an in-circuit emulator.
Emulation Probe
(EP-17120CS)
The EP-17120CS, which is the emulation probe for the µPD17120 sub-
series, connects between an SE board and a target system.
PROM Programmer
AF-9703, AF-9704, AF-9705, and AF-9706 are the PROM programmers
Note 3
AF-9703
AF-9704
AF-9705
compatible with the µPD17P132 and 17P133. By connecting them to the
Note 3
program adapter AF-9808M, the µPD17P132 and 17P133 are enabled for
programming.
Note 3
Note 3
AF-9706
Program Adapter
The AF-9808M, which is an adapter for programming the µPD17P132CS,
17P132GT, 17P132CS, and 17P33GT, is used in combination with the AF-
9703, AF9704, AF-9705, or AF-9706.
(AF-9808MNote 3
)
Notes 1. Low-price version: External-power type
2. This is a product of I.C Co., Ltd. For further details, please contact I.C Co. in Tokyo (Tel: 03-3447-
3793).
3. This is the product of the Ando Electric, Ltd. For further details, please contact Ando Electric Co.,
Ltd. in Tokyo (Tel: 03-3733-1151).
267
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
Software
Name
Outline
Host Machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Supply Medium
5-inch 2HD
Part Number
17K-Series AS17K is an assembler
Assembler which can be used in
(AS17K)
µS5A10AS17K
MS-DOSTM
common for the 17K
series. For program
development of the
3.5-inch 2HD µS5A13AS17K
µPD17120 series, AS17K
and device files (AS17120,
AS17121, AS17132,
AS17133) are used
together.
5-inch 2HC
µS7B10AS17K
IBM PC/AT
PC-9800 series
IBM PC/AT
PC DOSTM
MS-DOS
PC DOS
3.5-inch 2HC µS7B13AS17K
Device
Files
AS17120, AS17121,
AS17132, and AS17133
AS17120 are the device files for the
5-inch 2HD
µS5A10AS17120Note
3.5-inch 2HD µS5A13AS17120Note
AS17121 µPD17120 subseries.
AS17132 These are used in combi-
AS17133 nation with the assembler
(AS17K) common to the
5-inch 2HC
µS7B10AS17120Note
17K series.
3.5-inch 2HC µS7B13AS17120Note
Support
Software
This software is used for
machine interfacing on
5-inch 2HD
µS5A10IE17K
(SIMPLE- WindowsTM when doing
PC-9800 series MS-DOS
HOST)
program development by
means of an in-circuit
emulator and a personal
computer.
3.5-inch 2HD µS5A13IE17K
Windows
5-inch 2HC
µS7B10IE17K
IBM PC/AT
PC DOS
3.5-inch 2HC µS7B13IE17K
Note µS××××AS17120 contains AS17120, AS17121, AS17132, and AS17133.
Remark Compatible OS versions include the following:
OS
Version
MS-DOS
PC DOS
Windows
Ver. 3.30 to Ver. 5.00ANote
Ver. 3.1 to Ver. 5.0Note
Ver. 3.0 to Ver. 3.1
Note MS-DOS Vers. 5.00/5.00A and PC DOS
Ver. 5.0 are equipped with the task
swapfunction. However, thissoftware
is not.
268
APPENDIX B ORDERING MASK ROM
After developing the program, place an order for the mask ROM version, according to the following procedure:
(1) Make reservation when ordering mask ROM.
Advice NEC of the schedule for placing an order for the mask ROM. If NEC is not informed in advance, on-
time delivery may not be possible.
(2) Create ordering medium.
Use UV-EPROM to place an order for the mask ROM.
Add/PROM as an assemble option of the Assembler (AS17K), and create a mask ROM ordering HEX file (with
extender for .PRO). Next, write the mask ROM ordering HEX file into the UV-EPROM. Create three UV-
EPROMs with the same contents.
(3) Prepare necessary documents.
Fill out the following forms to place an order for the mask ROM:
• Mask ROM ordering sheet
• Mask ROM ordering check sheet
(4) Ordering
Submit the media created in (2) and documents prepared in (3) to NEC by the specified date.
269
[MEMO]
270
APPENDIX C CAUTIONS TO TAKE IN SYSTEM CLOCK OSCILLATION CIRCUIT CONFIGURATIONS
The system clock oscillation circuit operates with a ceramic resonator connected to the X1 and X2 pins or with
an oscillation resistor connected to the OSC1 and OSC0 pins.
Figure C-1 shows the externally installed system clock oscillation circuit.
Figure C-1. Externally Installed System Clock Oscillation Circuit
µPD17121
µPD17133
µPD17120
µPD17132
µPD17P132
µPD17P133
XOUT
XIN
GND
OSC1
OSC0
Ceramic Resonator
Oscillation Resistor
Caution Regarding the system clock oscillation circuit, make sure that its ground wire's resistance
component and impedance component are minimized. Also, to avoid the effect of wiring
capacity, etc., please wire the part encircled in the dotted line in Figure C-1 in the manner
described below:
•
•
Make the wiring as short as possible.
Do not allow it to intersect other signal conductors. Do not let it be near lines in which a large
fluctuating current flows.
•
•
Make sure that the grounding point of the oscillation circuit's capacitor is constantly at the
same electric potential as VSS. Do not let it be near a GND wire in which a large current flows.
Do not extract signals from the oscillation circuit.
Figure C-2 shows unsatisfactory oscillation circuit examples.
271
APPENDIX C CAUTIONS TO TAKE IN SYSTEM CLOCK OSCILLATION CIRCUIT
Figure C-2. Unsatisfactory Oscillation Circuit Examples
(a) Connecting circuit whose wiring is too long (b) Signal conductors are intersecting
PORT
XIN
GND
XOUT
XIN
GND
XOUT
Too long
(c) Functuating large current located
too close to the signal conductor
(d) Current flowing in the GND line of the
oscillation circuit
(Points A and B's potentials change as to point C.)
XIN
GND
PORT
XIN
GND
C
XOUT
XOUT
Large
current
A
B
Large-volume current
(e) Signals are being extracted
XIN
GND
XOUT
272
APPENDIX D INSTRUCTION LIST
[A]
ADD
ADD
MOVT DBF, @AR…229
m, #n4…193
r, m…189
[N]
NOP…249
ADDC m, #n4…198
ADDC r, m…195
AND
AND
m, #n4…214
r, m…213
[O]
OR
m, #n4…212
r, m…211
OR
[B]
BR
BR
addr…239
@AR…240
[P]
PEEK
WR, rf…234
POKE rf, WR…235
POP AR…233
PUSH AR…230
[C]
CALL
CALL
addr…217
@AR:…242
PUT
p, DBF…238
[D]
DI…248
[R]
RET…245
RETI…246
[E]
RETSK…245
RORC r…221
EI…247
[G]
GET
[S]
DBF, p…236
SKE
SKF
m, #n4…218
m, #n…217
[H]
HALT h…249
SKGE m, #n4…220
SKLT m, #n4…220
SKNE m, #n4…219
[I]
SKT
ST
m, #n…216
m, r…224
INC
INC
AR…199
IX…201
STOP s…249
SUB
SUB
m, #n4…205
r, m…202
[L]
LD
r, m…222
SUBC m, #n4…209
SUBC r, m…207
[M]
MOV
m, #n4…229
m, @r…227
@r, m…225
[X]
XOR
XOR
MOV
MOV
m, #n4…216
r, m…214
273
[MEMO]
274
相关型号：
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明